WO2019154386A1 - 无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质 - Google Patents

无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019154386A1
WO2019154386A1 PCT/CN2019/074664 CN2019074664W WO2019154386A1 WO 2019154386 A1 WO2019154386 A1 WO 2019154386A1 CN 2019074664 W CN2019074664 W CN 2019074664W WO 2019154386 A1 WO2019154386 A1 WO 2019154386A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
user equipment
group
control information
dmrs
control channel
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/074664
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
曹建飞
崔焘
Original Assignee
索尼公司
曹建飞
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 索尼公司, 曹建飞 filed Critical 索尼公司
Priority to KR1020207017749A priority Critical patent/KR20200119781A/ko
Priority to US16/754,748 priority patent/US11356153B2/en
Priority to CN201980004999.8A priority patent/CN111213425A/zh
Publication of WO2019154386A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019154386A1/zh
Priority to US17/730,197 priority patent/US20220263548A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0452—Multi-user MIMO systems
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L1/00—Arrangements for detecting or preventing errors in the information received
    • H04L1/0001—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff
    • H04L1/0036—Systems modifying transmission characteristics according to link quality, e.g. power backoff arrangements specific to the receiver
    • H04L1/0038—Blind format detection
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0014—Three-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0023—Time-frequency-space
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0037—Inter-user or inter-terminal allocation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/005—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of common pilots, i.e. pilots destined for multiple users or terminals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0058—Allocation criteria
    • H04L5/0062—Avoidance of ingress interference, e.g. ham radio channels
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/02—Arrangements for optimising operational condition
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/12—Wireless traffic scheduling
    • H04W72/121—Wireless traffic scheduling for groups of terminals or users
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H04L5/0051—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver of dedicated pilots, i.e. pilots destined for a single user or terminal

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication technologies, and in particular, to an apparatus and method for optimizing a multi-user multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) transmission in a wireless communication system.
  • Transient computer readable storage medium Transient computer readable storage medium.
  • New Radio is a next-generation wireless access method for Long Term Evolution (LTE), and is a Radio Access Technology (RAT) different from LTE.
  • NR is capable of coping with various use cases including Enhanced Mobile Broadband (eMBB), Massive Machine Type Communications (mMTC), and Ultra reliable and low latency communications (URLLC). (use case) access technology.
  • eMBB Enhanced Mobile Broadband
  • mMTC Massive Machine Type Communications
  • URLLC Ultra reliable and low latency communications
  • the NR is studied with the technical architecture corresponding to the utilization scenarios, request conditions, and configuration scenarios in these use cases. The details of the scenario and request condition of the NR are disclosed in Non-Patent Document 1.
  • a downlink data channel ie, a physical downlink shared channel, PDSCH
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • Transparent MU-MIMO transmission means that the target user equipment (User Equipment, UE) does not know the existence of other user equipments that are scheduled to perform MU-MIMO transmission together, that is, the target UE does not know other user equipments.
  • the layer where the data stream is located has the exact interference to the layer where the target data stream is located, so that the receiver of the target UE only attempts to decode the target data stream, and the inter-layer interference cannot be effectively processed.
  • the user equipment in the "transparent" MU-MIMO transmission cannot realize the interference measurement between multiple users because it does not know the interference situation between multiple users, and thus cannot suppress or eliminate the interference between multiple users, which is reduced to some extent. System throughput and reliability.
  • MU-MIMO transmission with respect to the downlink control channel (physical downlink control channel, PDCCH) has not been proposed.
  • PDCCH physical downlink control channel
  • UE-specific PDCCH only a user-specific physical downlink control channel (UE-specific PDCCH) for a specific user equipment is transmitted on a certain transmission resource, and the control channels of different user equipments cannot be utilized.
  • the airspace processing capabilities of the antennas share the transmission resources. That is to say, in the prior art, UE-specific PDDCHs of different user equipments are not superimposed on the same transmission resource for transmission, which reduces the utilization of time-frequency resources.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 3rd Generation Partnership Project; Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network; Study on Scenarios and Requirements for Next Generation Access Technologies; (Release 14), 3GPP TR 38.913 V0.2.0 (2016-02).
  • an apparatus in a wireless communication system comprising processing circuitry configured to share a physical downlink control channel with a group of a group of user equipment comprising a target user equipment (group Common PDCCH) to obtain control information about multi-user-multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) transmission of the control channel; and user-specific physical downlink control channel (UE-specific) for the target user equipment based on the control information
  • group Common PDCCH target user equipment
  • UE-specific user-specific physical downlink control channel
  • the PDCCH is decoded to obtain the dedicated transmission control information about the target user equipment, where the UE-specific PDCCH of the target user equipment is superimposed on the same transmission resource with the UE-specific PDCCH of other user equipments in the group of user equipments. transmission.
  • an apparatus in a wireless communication system comprising processing circuitry configured to: generate a group common PDCCH of a group of user equipments And a user-specific physical downlink control channel (UE-specific PDCCH) of each user equipment in the group of user equipments, where the group shared physical downlink control channel includes multiple users of the control channel of all user equipments in a group of user equipments.
  • UE-specific PDCCH user-specific physical downlink control channel
  • the control base station transmits the group shared physical downlink control channel to a group of user equipments; and based on the control information, the control base station transmits each of a group of user equipments on the same transmission resource UE-specific PDCCH of the user equipment.
  • a method in a wireless communication system comprising: decoding a group common PDCCH of a group of user equipments including a target user equipment, to Obtaining control information about multi-user-multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) transmission of the control channel; and decoding, based on the control information, a user-specific physical downlink control channel (UE-specific PDCCH) of the target user equipment to obtain The dedicated transmission control information about the target user equipment, wherein the UE-specific PDCCH of the target user equipment is superimposed on the same transmission resource with the UE-specific PDCCH of other user equipments in the group of user equipments for transmission.
  • MU-MIMO multi-user-multiple input multiple output
  • a method in a wireless communication system comprising: generating a group shared physical downlink control channel (Group common PDCCH) of a group of user equipments, and each user in a group of user equipments A user-specific physical downlink control channel (UE-specific PDCCH) of the device, the group shared physical downlink control channel including multi-user-multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) transmission of control channels for all user equipments in a group of user equipments And controlling the base station to send the group shared physical downlink control channel to a group of user equipments; and, based on the control information, controlling the base station to transmit the UE-specific PDCCH of each of the group of user equipments on the same transmission resource.
  • Group common PDCCH group shared physical downlink control channel
  • UE-specific PDCCH user-specific physical downlink control channel
  • MU-MIMO multi-user-multiple input multiple output
  • an apparatus in a wireless communication system comprising processing circuitry configured to: perform multi-user-multiple scheduling simultaneously with respect to user equipment and other user equipment from a base station Entering control information of multi-output (MU-MIMO) transmission, determining transmission-related configurations of other user equipments, wherein the control information includes information indirectly indicating transmission-related configurations of other user equipments; and based on the determined other user equipments
  • the transmission related configuration decodes a signal transmitted from the base station and transmitted using the MU-MIMO transmission to acquire a signal portion for the user equipment.
  • an apparatus in a wireless communication system comprising processing circuitry configured to perform multi-user-multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) for simultaneous scheduling Generating, for each of the one or more user equipments within the set of user equipments, control information regarding MU-MIMO transmissions, and controlling the base station to transmit control information to the user equipment, wherein the control information includes indirect Information indicating a transmission related configuration of other user equipments other than the user equipment in a group of user equipments; and controlling the base station to simultaneously transmit signals to a group of user equipments on a specific transmission resource.
  • MU-MIMO multi-user-multiple input multiple output
  • a method in a wireless communication system comprising: performing multi-user-multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) according to a user equipment and other user equipments simultaneously scheduled from a base station. Controlling transmission information, determining transmission related configuration of other user equipment, wherein the control information includes information indirectly indicating transmission related configuration of other user equipment; and based on the determined transmission related configuration of other user equipment, to the secondary base station.
  • MU-MIMO multi-user-multiple input multiple output
  • a method in a wireless communication system comprising: for one of a group of user equipments that are simultaneously scheduled for multi-user-multiple input multiple output (MU-MIMO) transmission Or each user equipment of the plurality of user equipments, generating control information about the MU-MIMO transmission, and controlling the base station to send control information to the user equipment, where the control information includes indirectly indicating a group of user equipments Information about transmission related configuration of other user equipments other than the user equipment; and controlling the base station to simultaneously transmit signals to a group of user equipment on a specific transmission resource.
  • MU-MIMO multi-user-multiple input multiple output
  • a non-transitory computer readable storage medium storing executable instructions, when executed by a processor, causing a processor to perform the method in the wireless communication system described above Or the various functions of the device.
  • each user equipment can share physical downlink by sharing the group
  • the control channel performs decoding to learn at least its own UE-specific PDCCH transmission-related configuration (for example, DMRS configuration), and further extracts its own UE-specific PDCCH from the received superposed signal according to the transmission-related configuration, thereby effectively implementing the downlink.
  • Control channel MU-MIMO transmission thereby improving resource utilization.
  • limited physical layer scheduling can be effectively utilized by indirectly indicating to a target UE a transmission-related configuration of other user equipments that are scheduled together with the target UE.
  • the signaling enables the target UE to determine, suppress, and/or cancel interference from other user equipment according to the transmission related configuration, thereby decoding the target data stream for the target UE, improving system throughput and reliability.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of "transparent" MU-MIMO transmission
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user equipment side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing a signaling interaction procedure for implementing a first example scheme according to a first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mapping relationship between a CSI-RS resource or a CSI-RS port and a DMRS port according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a specific functional configuration example of a determination unit in a device on the user equipment side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a specific functional configuration example of an interference measuring unit in a device on the user equipment side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a specific functional configuration example of a control information generating unit in a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a signaling interaction procedure for implementing a second example scheme according to a first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 15 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user equipment side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 16 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a signaling interaction procedure for implementing a third example scheme according to a first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mapping pattern of DMRS ports 7 to 10 on a resource element (RE);
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user equipment side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 20 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 21 is a flowchart showing a signaling interaction procedure for implementing the fourth example scheme according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 22 is a flowchart showing a signaling interaction procedure of a two-stage DCI structure for implementing MU-MIMO transmission of a control channel according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration example of a device on the user equipment side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 24 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 25 is a schematic diagram showing an example architecture of a GC-PDCCH and a relationship between a GC-PDCCH and a UE-specific PDDCH according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic view showing a first exemplary scheme according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 29 is a schematic view showing a second exemplary aspect of the second embodiment according to the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user equipment side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 31 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 32A is a schematic diagram showing a first example of a modification of the second exemplary embodiment according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 32B is a schematic diagram showing a second example of a modification of the second exemplary embodiment according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a relationship between a GC-PDCCH and a UE-specific PDCCH in a time-frequency domain according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 34 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 35 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a method on the user equipment side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a method at the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure
  • 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a method at the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing an example structure of a personal computer which is an information processing apparatus which can be employed in an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. 41 is a block diagram showing a first example of a schematic configuration of an evolved node (eNB) to which the technology of the present disclosure may be applied;
  • eNB evolved node
  • FIG. 42 is a block diagram showing a second example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which the technology of the present disclosure may be applied;
  • FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a smartphone to which the technology of the present disclosure can be applied;
  • 44 is a block diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a car navigation device to which the technology of the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the base station In "transparent" MU-MIMO transmission, as shown in FIG. 1, the base station simultaneously schedules multiple UEs for downlink MU-MIMO transmission.
  • one layer of signal stream for UE k and other three layer signal streams (which may be for one or more other user equipments) share the same time-frequency resource by spatial multiplexing, but UE k itself
  • the existence of other layers is not known (these layers are indicated by dashed lines in Figure 1), i.e., UE k does not know the exact interference from other layers.
  • the receiver of UE k only attempts to recover the downlink signal sent by the base station to UE k, and cannot effectively process the inter-layer interference.
  • the base station schedules the signal flows of the UE k and other one or more user equipments on the same time-frequency resource, and simultaneously informs the UE k of the existence of other layers ( These layers are indicated by solid lines in Figure 2, such that the receiver of UE k can recover the downlink signal sent by the base station to UE k by processing the interference from other layers.
  • non-transparent MU-MIMO transmission over “transparent” MU-MIMO transmission is that UEs under non-transparent transmission can know the interference situation between multiple users, so that more advanced receivers can be used to suppress or eliminate Inter-user interference, which improves the throughput and reliability of the entire system; and makes it possible to measure interference between multiple users by knowing the situation of multiple users.
  • the interference measurement here is based on DMRS.
  • a possible disadvantage is that in order for a UE in a multi-user transmission to know other users with which to schedule a time-frequency resource, additional signaling is required; and advanced receivers tend to introduce greater detection complexity, such that The receiver consumes more computational and time resources.
  • non-transparent MU-MIMO transmission of a data channel with less signaling overhead and less computational and temporal resources is addressed to optimize “non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 300 may include a determining unit 302 and a decoding unit 304.
  • each of the above functional units and modules may be implemented as a separate physical entity, or may also be implemented by a single entity (eg, a processor (CPU or DSP, etc.), an integrated circuit, etc.), which is equally applicable to subsequent Description of other configuration examples on the user device side.
  • a processor CPU or DSP, etc.
  • an integrated circuit etc.
  • the determining unit 302 may be configured to determine a transmission related configuration of the other user equipment according to the control information from the base station that the target user equipment and the other user equipment are simultaneously scheduled for MU-MIMO transmission, the control information including indirectly indicating the other user equipment The information about the transmission related configuration.
  • a base station notifies a UE in a MU-MIMO transmission of its corresponding DMRS port number, a scrambling ID, and a layer occupied by a signal stream of the UE through a downlink control channel.
  • the transport related configuration herein includes a DMRS configuration.
  • the DMRS configuration may preferably refer directly to the DMRS port index.
  • the DMRS configuration may also refer to information used to generate a pseudo-random sequence of the DMRS and a corresponding orthogonal cover code (OCC).
  • OCC orthogonal cover code
  • one pseudo random sequence can apply multiple OCC codes to generate multiple orthogonal DMRSs, so the same pseudo random sequence can be used for multiple UEs.
  • the DMRS configuration of other UEs can be controlled by downlink.
  • the channels are notified one by one to the target UE.
  • the total number of signal streams of the MU-MIMO transmission tends to be large, in other words, the number of DMRS ports is large, and the manner of notifying the one by one will result in a comparison.
  • the large signaling overhead causes a waste of valuable physical layer signaling resources, which may not be suitable for an application scenario with large data volume transmission requirements in the NR.
  • control information about the MU-MIMO transmission of the target UE includes information indirectly indicating the DMRS configuration of other user equipments, so that the target UE can be enabled with as little signaling overhead as possible.
  • the DMRS configuration of other user equipments is learned based on the control information.
  • the decoding unit 304 can be configured to decode the signal transmitted from the base station using the MU-MIMO transmission based on the determined transmission related configuration of the other user equipment to acquire a signal portion for the user equipment.
  • the decoding operation of the decoding unit 304 will be described in further detail by taking serial interference cancellation as an example.
  • the target UE is k
  • the signal transmitted from the base station using MU-MIMO transmission is as follows:
  • H k is the channel from the base station to UE k
  • P k is the precoding vector of UE k
  • n k is the receiver noise of UE k
  • H k P i x i is from UE i in MU-MIMO transmission Interference. If UE k knows the DMRS configuration information of UE i, it may first estimate the interference equivalent channel from UE i, ie H k P i , and try to decode the data x i of UE i ; if UE k can decode If x i is estimated and H k P i is estimated, the interference of UE i with UE k can be recovered, so that the interference can be subtracted in the above equation. By sequentially eliminating interference from all UEs of i ⁇ k, you can get:
  • UE k can use the conventional linear receiver W to decode the data sent by the base station to UE k:
  • the decoding operation based on the DMRS configuration information about other interfering user equipments in the MU-MIMO transmission to decode the target data stream is merely an example, and those skilled in the art may also adopt other methods known in the art or Other decoding operations that may occur in the future, based on interfering UE DMRS configuration information to decode the target data stream, the present disclosure does not limit the specific decoding mode.
  • the device 300 on the user equipment side described above may be implemented at the chip level or may be implemented at the device level.
  • device 300 can operate as a user device itself, and can also include external devices such as a memory, a transceiver (optionally shown in dashed boxes in Figure 3), and the like.
  • the memory can be used to store programs and related data information that the user device needs to perform to implement various functions.
  • the transceiver may include one or more communication interfaces to support communication with different devices (e.g., base stations, other user equipment, etc.), and implementations of the transceivers are not specifically limited herein. The same applies to the subsequent description of other configuration examples on the user equipment side.
  • the present disclosure also provides a configuration example of the following base station side.
  • 4 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 400 may include a control information generating unit 402 and a transmission control unit 404.
  • each of the above functional units or modules may be implemented as a separate physical entity, or may also be implemented by a single entity (eg, a processor (CPU or DSP, etc.), an integrated circuit, etc.), which is equally applicable to subsequent Description of other configuration examples on the base station side.
  • a processor CPU or DSP, etc.
  • an integrated circuit etc.
  • the control information generating unit 402 may be configured to generate control information about MU-MIMO transmission for each user equipment in one or more user equipments within a group of user equipments that are simultaneously scheduled for MU-MIMO transmission, and control The base station transmits the generated control information to the user equipment.
  • the generated control information includes information that indirectly indicates a transmission related configuration of other user equipments other than the user equipment in a group of user equipments.
  • the transport related configuration herein includes a DMRS configuration.
  • the receivers of each of the user equipments may have different processing capabilities. For some user equipments with weak receiver processing capability, even if the DMRS configurations of other UEs in the group are informed, the receivers of these user equipments may not be able to decode their target data streams by, for example, the linear interference cancellation method described above. At this time, if the DMRS configuration from the interfering UE is still notified to these user equipments through the control channel, it is actually a waste of physical layer signaling resources. Therefore, for this part of the user equipment, it is preferable to configure "transparent" MU-MIMO transmission, ie only inform these user equipments of their own DMRS configuration.
  • the "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission proposed by the present disclosure may be preferably configured, that is, the information that indirectly indicates the transmission related configuration of other UEs in the group includes: These user equipments are notified in the control information so that these user equipments can learn and eliminate interference from other UEs.
  • the above "one or more user equipments of a group of user equipments” means that the user equipments that can support and implement “non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmissions.
  • target user equipment it generally refers to any one of the one or more user equipments.
  • the base station side control information generating unit 402 also The above control information may be generated for each user device in the entire group of user devices.
  • the base station can flexibly determine which UEs need to perform "transparent" MU-MIMO transmission and which UEs can apply the non-transparent MU-MIMO transmission according to the related information of the user equipment, which is not disclosed in this disclosure. Make specific restrictions.
  • Transmission control unit 404 can be configured to control the base station to simultaneously transmit respective signals to a group of user equipment on the same particular transmission resource.
  • the user equipment receiving the generated control information can learn the DMRS configuration of other user equipments in the group, and then receive the signal from other user equipments by superimposing the signals with other target devices as interference cancellation.
  • the target signal is demodulated.
  • an attempt is made to recover the target signal from the received superimposed signal directly according to its own DMRS configuration.
  • the apparatus 400 on the base station side described above may be implemented at the chip level or may be implemented at the device level.
  • device 400 can operate as a base station itself, and can also include external devices such as a memory, a transceiver (optionally shown in dashed boxes in Figure 4), and the like.
  • the memory can be used to store programs and related data information that the base station needs to perform to implement various functions.
  • the transceiver may include one or more communication interfaces to support communication with different devices (eg, user equipment, other base stations, etc.), and implementations of the transceiver are not specifically limited herein. The same applies to the subsequent description of other configuration examples on the base station side.
  • the first to fourth example schemes for implementing the DMRS configuration indirectly indicating the interfering UE will be separately described below.
  • those skilled in the art can appropriately modify these example schemes according to the principles of the present disclosure to obtain other schemes for indirectly indicating the DMRS configuration of the interfering UE. Such modifications should obviously be considered as falling into the present.
  • the control information from the base station may include a total number of layers of the DMRS configuration and MU-MIMO transmission of the target user equipment.
  • MU-MIMO transmission one layer of data stream corresponds to one DMRS port. Therefore, the total number of layers of MU-MIMO transmission here can also be considered as the total number of DMRS configurations or DMRS ports, or the total number of data streams. How to derive other DMRS configurations of interfering user equipment according to the DMRS configuration of the target user equipment and the total number of layers of the MU-MIMO transmission will be described in detail below.
  • FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of the device on the user device side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 500 may include a determining unit 502 and a decoding unit 504.
  • the functional configuration example of the decoding unit 504 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the decoding unit 304 described above with reference to FIG. 3, and will not be repeated here.
  • the determining unit 502 may further include a DMRS allocation scheme acquisition module 5021, a DMRS configuration set determination module 5022, and a DMRS configuration determination module 5023.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme acquisition module 5021 can be configured to obtain a DMRS allocation scheme for MU-MIMO transmission by receiving from a base station or reading from a memory.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme herein may indicate the allocation manner of the DMRS port, which may be dynamically configured by the base station through high layer signaling (for example, RRC layer signaling), or may be a default allocation manner pre-stored in the memory.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme acquiring module 5021 can obtain the DMRS allocation scheme by decoding the high layer signaling from the base station.
  • the DMRS configuration set determining module 5022 can be configured to determine a DMRS configuration set for MU-MIMO transmission based on at least a DMRS allocation scheme and a total number of layers.
  • the DMRS configuration set here refers to a set of DMRS configurations of a group of user equipments participating in MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the DMRS configuration determination module 5023 may be configured to determine a DMRS configuration of a DMRS configuration different from the user equipment in the DMRS configuration set as a DMRS configuration of other user equipment.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme may include a sequence of DMRS configurations that represent a plurality of DMRS configurations that are sequentially arranged for one MU-MIMO transmission, and the DMRS configuration set determination module 5022 may configure from the DMRS according to a predetermined order.
  • the number of reads in the sequence equals the total number of layers of the DMRS configuration as a DMRS configuration set.
  • DMRS configuration set For example, in an LTE system, eight DMRS ports are numbered as antenna ports 7 through 14. It is assumed that the DMRS configuration sequence configured by the base station through RRC signaling is [7, 8, 11, 13, 9, 10, 12, 14], and the total number of MU-MIMO transmission layers is 6 layers, and is pre-agreed or configured by the base station. The order of use is, for example, sequential reading from the end of the sequence, and the DMRS configuration set determining module 5022 reads the last six DMRS configurations 11, 13, 9, 10, 12, 14 from the sequence as the MU-MIMO transmission. DMRS configuration set.
  • the DMRS configuration determining module 5023 of the target user equipment can determine the numbers 11, 13, 9, 12, 14 as the DMRS ports corresponding to the interference data streams of other user equipments.
  • the number of the DMRS port is different from that of the LTE system, and the DMRS port index is 1000 to 1011.
  • various examples described in the LTE system in the present disclosure may be applied, and details are not described herein for brevity.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme may include a sequence of DMRS configurations, which may not indicate the order of use of the DMRS configuration therein, and the foregoing control information may include, in addition to the DMRS configuration and the total number of layers of the target UE, The starting layer sequence number of the MU-MIMO transmission included in the configuration sequence.
  • the DMRS configuration set determining module 5022 may be further configured to sequentially read the number of DMRS configurations equal to the total number of layers from the sequence of DMRS configurations starting from the DMRS configuration corresponding to the starting layer sequence number in the sequence of DMRS configurations. As a DMRS configuration set.
  • the DMRS configuration sequence [7, 8, 11, 13, 9, 10, 12, 14] configured as above is taken as an example, and the sequence number of each DMRS port in the sequence may be considered to correspond to MU-MIMO.
  • the layer number of the transmission For example, DMRS port 7 corresponds to layer 1, DMRS port 11 corresponds to layer 3, and so on.
  • the DMRS configuration set determining module 5022 sequentially reads six DMRS configurations 8, 11, 13 from the second DMRS port in the sequence. 9, 10, 12 serve as a set of DMRS configurations for the MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the DMRS configuration determining module 5023 of the target user equipment can determine the numbers 8, 11, 13, 9, 12 as the DMRS ports corresponding to the interference data streams of other user equipments.
  • the starting layer sequence number of the MU-MIMO transmission in the control information by further specifying the starting layer sequence number of the MU-MIMO transmission in the control information, it is possible to support more flexible use of the DMRS configuration for MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme may include information indicating the order of use of the DMRS configuration.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme indicates that the order of use of the DMRS ports is used in the order of number from small to large (7 to 14), or in order from large to small (14 to 7), or in a specific order specified, For example, a sequence indicating the order of use [7, 8, 11, 13, 9, 10, 12, 14].
  • the DMRS configuration set determining module 502 may be further configured to acquire a DMRS configuration set equal to the total number of layers in accordance with the order of use indicated by the DMRS allocation scheme.
  • the DMRS configuration set determining module 5022 can directly acquire 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 as A set of DMRS configurations for MU-MIMO transmission. Assuming that the DMRS port number of the target user equipment is 10, the DMRS configuration determining module 5023 of the target user equipment can determine the numbers 7, 8, 9, 11, 12 as the DMRS ports corresponding to the interference data streams of other user equipments.
  • FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 600 may include a control information generating unit 602 and a transmission control unit 604.
  • the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 604 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 404 described above with reference to FIG. 4, and will not be repeated here.
  • the control information generating unit 602 may be configured to generate control information for a target user equipment in a group of user equipments performing MU-MIMO transmission by including a total number of layers of the DMRS configuration and MU-MIMO transmission of the user equipment, and control The base station sends the generated control information to the target user equipment, so that the target user equipment derives the DMRS configuration of other interfering UEs in the group according to the control information and the DMRS allocation scheme pre-stored or configured by the base station.
  • the apparatus 600 may further include a DMRS allocation scheme generating unit 606.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme generating unit 606 may be configured to generate a DMRS allocation scheme for MU-MIMO transmission, and control the base station to transmit the generated DMRS allocation scheme to the target user equipment, for the user equipment to be based on at least the DMRS allocation scheme, the The DMRS configuration and the total number of layers of the user equipment determine the DMRS configuration of other user equipments within a group of user equipment.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme generating unit 606 transmits to the target user equipment by including the generated DMRS allocation scheme in higher layer signaling (eg, RRC signaling).
  • higher layer signaling eg, RRC signaling
  • the generated DMRS allocation scheme may include a sequence of DMRS configurations, such that the user equipment may read a number of DMRS configurations equal to the total number of layers from the sequence according to a predetermined order as a DMRS configuration set for MU-MIMO transmission. .
  • the generated DMRS allocation scheme may include a sequence of DMRS configurations
  • the control information generating unit 602 may be further configured to include the DMRS configuration sequence in addition to the DMRS configuration and the total number of layers of the target UE.
  • the starting layer sequence number of the MU-MIMO transmission is used to generate control information, so that the user equipment can start from the DMRS configuration corresponding to the starting layer sequence number, and sequentially read the DMRS configuration whose number is equal to the total number of layers in the DMRS configuration sequence.
  • the generated DMRS allocation scheme may include information of a usage order of the DMRS configuration, so that the user equipment may read the DMRS configuration equal to the total number of layers according to the usage order as the DMRS configuration for MU-MIMO transmission. set.
  • the DMRS allocation scheme generating unit 606 shown in FIG. 6 is optional (shown in broken lines in FIG. 6). In the case where the DMRS allocation scheme is pre-configured and stored in the memory on the user equipment side, the unit may also be omitted.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a signaling interaction procedure for implementing the first example scheme, according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • step S701 after establishing an RRC connection, the base station notifies the user equipment k (UE k) of the DMRS allocation scheme by RRC signaling. Then, in step S702, the base station transmits a downlink reference signal (for example, channel state information-reference signal CSI-RS) to the user equipment k to acquire a channel state. In step S703, the user equipment k feeds back the measured channel state information to the base station.
  • the base station integrates the channel state information reported by the multiple user equipments to perform MU-MIMO transmission scheduling, and transmits control information including the DMRS configuration of the user equipment k and the total number of MU-MIMO transmission layers to the user equipment k in step S704.
  • the control information may be included in user-specific downlink control information (UE-specific DCI) transmitted on the PDCCH.
  • UE-specific DCI user-specific downlink control information
  • the base station performs downlink data transmission to a group of user equipments including the user equipment k on the same time-frequency resource according to the determined MU-MIMO transmission configuration.
  • the user equipment k can learn the DMRS configuration of itself and other UEs in the group by decoding the received DCI, and then demodulate the received data information according to the information.
  • the signaling interaction process described above with reference to FIG. 7 is merely an example and not a limitation, and those skilled in the art may modify the above interaction process according to the principles of the above disclosure and the actual situation.
  • the various steps numbered in FIG. 7 are merely for convenience of description and are not meant to limit the order of execution.
  • some interaction processes that are less relevant to the techniques of the present disclosure are omitted in the above-described flowcharts.
  • some of the steps in the above flow chart may be omitted.
  • step S701 the configuration of the DMRS allocation scheme in the above step S701 may be omitted (shown in broken lines in step S701 in FIG. 7). All such modifications are considered to fall within the scope of the present disclosure and are not enumerated herein.
  • the DMRS configuration of other UEs in the group can be indirectly indicated to the target UE by utilizing the DMRS configuration of the target UE itself and the total number of layers of MU-MIMO transmission, which can be smaller.
  • Signaling overhead to achieve "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission is beneficial to optimize system performance of MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the interference measurement resource may include a non-zero power CSI-RS (Non-Zero Power CSI-RS) resource.
  • the interference measurement resource may further include a Channel State Information-Interference Measurement (CSI-IM) resource.
  • CSI-IM Channel State Information-Interference Measurement
  • the present disclosure proposes that the interference information in the MU-MIMO transmission can be indirectly indicated based on the CSI-RS resources selected in the multi-user interference measurement, so that the user equipment can indirectly introduce the interference according to the information about the CSI-RS resources.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mapping relationship between a CSI-RS resource or a CSI-RS port and a DMRS port according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a mapping relationship between a CSI-RS resource and a DMRS port may be established. For example, as shown in FIG. 8, taking the NR system as an example, the CSI-RS resource 1 is mapped to the DMRS ports 1007, 1008, and 1011; the CSI-RS resource 2 is mapped to the DMRS ports 1007 and 1003; and the CSI-RS resource 3 is mapped to the DMRS. Ports 1011, 1004.
  • a mapping relationship between a CSI-RS port and a DMRS port may also be established.
  • the CSI-RS supports setting of some or all of the 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24, and 32 antenna ports, for example, the CSI-RS supports 32 antenna ports, that is, the CSI-RS can be transmitted by 32 antenna ports.
  • a CSI-RS is transmitted using one or more of antenna ports 15 to 46 (port numbers 15 to 46). Further, the supported antenna port may be determined according to the terminal device capability of the terminal device, the setting of the RRC parameter, and/or the set transmission mode.
  • the CSI-RS ports there are 32 CSI-RS ports (the actual antenna port number in the NR system is 3000 to 3031) and 12 DMRS ports (the actual antenna port number in the NR system is 1000 to 1011), so that the CSI-RS port can be implemented. Mapping to the DMRS port. For example, one CSI-RS port can be uniquely mapped to one DMRS port, and one DMRS port can be mapped to multiple CSI-RS ports, so that the corresponding DMRS port can be uniquely determined according to the CSI-RS port. For example, as shown in FIG.
  • CSI-RS ports 3015 and 3018 are both mapped to DMRS port 1007
  • CSI-RS port 3016 is mapped to DMRS port 1008
  • CSI-RS ports 3017 and 3030 are both mapped to DMRS port 1011, and so on, I will not list them one by one here.
  • the user equipment may according to the indication information about the CSI-RS resource or the CSI-RS port from the base station, and the Mapping relationships to determine the corresponding DMRS port.
  • the base station may configure multiple interference measurement resources corresponding to multiple multi-user combinations, for example, CSI-RS resources, for multiple user equipments at the RRC layer.
  • multiple interference measurement resources for example, CSI-RS resources
  • a mapping relationship between the base station and the user equipment exists between the CSI-RS resources or the CSI-RS port and the DMRS port.
  • Each CSI-RS resource may correspond to a MU combination.
  • NZP CSI-RS resource 1 corresponds to a MU combination including UE 1, UE m, and UE n
  • NZP CSI-RS resource 2 corresponds to a MU combination including UE 2 and UE 4
  • NZP CSI-RS Resource 3 corresponds to a MU combination including UE j and UE t.
  • the user equipment measures multiple CSI-RS resources and reports the measurement result to the base station. After receiving the measurement results reported by the multiple user equipments, the base station runs a multi-user scheduling algorithm to determine a group of user equipments to perform MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the base station may select a CSI-RS resource corresponding to the MU scheduling result from the configured multiple CSI-RS resources, and notify the user equipment of the selected CSI-RS resource, and the user equipment may according to the known mapping relationship.
  • the DMRS ports of other UEs participating in the MU-MIMO transmission are known, thereby implementing "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the NZP CSI-RS based antenna port is used to mimic the interference of the MU-MIMO transmission of the data channel, and the NZP CSI-RS is used to conform to the DMRS.
  • the NZP CSI-RS and DMRS should occupy the same or similar frequency band resources, such as occupying the same sub-band resources.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 900 may include a determining unit 902 and a decoding unit 904.
  • the functional configuration example of the decoding unit 904 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the decoding unit 304 described above with reference to FIG. 3, and details are not described herein again.
  • the determining unit 902 may be configured to determine a transmission related configuration of the interfering UE based on control information from the base station, the control information may include information or indication indicating that the base station selects an interference measurement resource from one or more interference measurement resources for transmission Information about the antenna port of the selected interference measurement resource.
  • the interference measurement resource may comprise an NZP CSI-RS resource.
  • the information indicating the selected interference measurement resource may include a CSI-RS Resource Indicator (CRI), so that the base station may include the CRI of the selected CSI-RS resource in, for example, a user-specific
  • CRI CSI-RS Resource Indicator
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a specific functional configuration example of a determination unit in the device on the user device side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the determining unit 902 may further include a mapping relationship obtaining module 1001 and a DMRS configuration determining module 1002.
  • the mapping relationship obtaining module 1001 may be configured to acquire information indicating a mapping relationship between the interference measurement resource or the antenna port for transmitting the interference measurement resource and the DMRS configuration by receiving from the base station or reading from the memory.
  • mapping relationship between the CSI-RS resource or the CSI-RS port and the DMRS port described above with reference to FIG. 8 may be pre-stored in the memory of the user equipment side, or may be performed by the base station through high layer signaling (for example, RRC signaling) Dynamic configuration.
  • the mapping relationship obtaining module 1001 may obtain the mapping relationship by decoding high layer signaling (for example, RRC signaling) from the base station.
  • the DMRS configuration determining module 1002 may be configured to determine a DMRS configuration corresponding to the interference measurement resource selected by the base station as a DMRS configuration of other user equipments based on the acquired mapping relationship.
  • the CRI included in the control information from the base station indicates that the selected interference measurement resource is CSI-RS resource 1
  • the acquired mapping relationship is a CSI-RS resource and a DMRS port.
  • the mapping relationship between the DMRS configuration determining module 1022 can directly determine that the DMRS ports corresponding to the CSI-RS resource 1 are 7, 8, 11 and determine the three ports as the DMRS configurations of the interfering UEs in the group.
  • the DMRS configuration determining module 1002 needs to first perform RRC-configured or pre-stored CSI-RS resources and CSI-RS according to the base station. Determining the correspondence between the ports, determining the CSI-RS port corresponding to the CSI-RS resource indicated by the CRI, and determining the DMRS port corresponding to the CSI-RS port according to the mapping relationship between the CSI-RS port and the DMRS port. To interfere with the DMRS configuration of the UE.
  • the DMRS configuration of the interfering UE can be similarly determined, which will not be discussed in detail herein.
  • the CRI is preferentially used to indirectly indicate the DMRS configuration of the interfering UE in order to reduce the signaling overhead of the physical layer.
  • device 900 can also include an interference measurement unit 906.
  • the interference measurement unit 906 can be configured to perform multi-user interference measurement based on the interference measurement resources configured by the base station and report the measurement result to the base station, so that the base station selects from the configured multiple interference measurement resources based on the measurement result.
  • a functional configuration example of the interference measuring unit 906 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a specific functional configuration example of an interference measuring unit in a device on the user equipment side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the interference measurement unit 906 may include an interference measurement resource acquisition module 1101, a measurement module 1102, and a control module 1103.
  • the interference measurement resource acquisition module 1101 may be configured to acquire one or more interference measurement resources by decoding high layer signaling received from the base station.
  • the base station configures M NZP CSI-RS resources, that is, CSI-RS resource 1 to CSI-RS resource M, for the user equipment by using the high layer RRC signaling, so that the interference measurement resource acquiring module 1101 can pass Decoding RRC signaling to acquire M NZP CSI-RS resources.
  • the measurement module 1102 can be configured to perform interference measurements based on one or more interference measurement resources and generate a measurement result indication corresponding to each of the one or more interference measurement resources.
  • the measurement module 1102 can separately measure M CSI-RS resources and generate measurement result indications corresponding to the M CSI-RS resources.
  • the measurement result indication may include at least one of a multi-user channel quality indicator (MU-CQI), a reference signal received power (RSRP), and a reference signal received quality (RSRQ).
  • MU-CQI multi-user channel quality indicator
  • RSRP reference signal received power
  • RSRQ reference signal received quality
  • the measurement module 1102 generates MU-CQI 1 to MU-CQI M corresponding to M CSI-RS resources, respectively.
  • the control module 1103 can be configured to control the user equipment to feed back all or a portion of the one or more measurement indications to the base station for the base station to select the selected interference measurement resource from the one or more interference measurement resources.
  • the control module 1103 can control the user equipment to report all M MU-CQIs to the base station, so that the base station integrates the measurement results from other user equipments and specific network conditions from the M CSI-RS resources. Select the appropriate CSI-RS resource.
  • the control module 1103 can also control the user equipment to report only a part of the MU-CQI to the base station, for example, only report the MU-CQI greater than the predetermined threshold, so that the base station only receives the measurement result thereof. Select from the CSI-RS resources.
  • FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 1200 may include a control information generating unit 1202 and a transmission control unit 1204.
  • the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 1204 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 404 described above with reference to FIG. 4, and will not be repeated here.
  • Control information generation unit 1202 may be configured to generate control information regarding MU-MIMO transmission based on multi-user interference measurements to indirectly indicate to the target UE a transmission related configuration of the interfering UE.
  • FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing a specific functional configuration example of a control information generating unit in a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • control information generating unit 1202 may include a resource configuration module 1301, a resource selection module 1302, and a control information generating module 1303.
  • the resource configuration module 1301 can be configured to configure one or more interference measurement resources for each of a group of user equipments to be MU-MIMO transmitted.
  • the resource configuration module 1301 may configure, for example, NZP CSI-RS resources for each user equipment by, for example, high layer RRC signaling, and the multiple CSI-RS resources may correspond to multiple MU combinations.
  • the resource selection module 1302 can be configured to, for the target user equipment, select interference from one or more interference measurement resources based on the measurement result feedback that the user equipment and other user equipment feedback based on the configured one or more interference measurement resources
  • the measurement resource selects a multi-user combination of MU-MIMO transmissions and generates indication information of the selected interference measurement resource or indication information of an antenna port for transmitting the selected interference measurement resource.
  • the base station sends a downlink reference signal CSI-RS to each user equipment based on the configured multiple CSI-RS resources, and receives a measurement result indication for one or more of the multiple CSI-RS resources reported by each user equipment.
  • the measurement result indication may include at least one of MU-CQI, RSRP, and RSRQ.
  • the resource selection module 1302 on the base station side can determine a group of user equipments to perform MU-MIMO transmission by using a known MU scheduling algorithm based on, for example, MU-CQI reported by multiple user equipments, thereby determining the target CSI-RS resource of the user equipment.
  • a specific MU scheduling algorithm refer to related descriptions in the prior art, and details are not described herein again.
  • the control information generating module 1303 may be configured to generate control information by including the indication information for the determined target user equipment of the group of user equipments.
  • control information generating module 1303 may include indication information (for example, CRI) of the selected CSI-RS resource or indication information (for example, CSI-RS port index) of the corresponding CSI-RS port in the control information. Transmitting to the target user equipment, for example, by using the UE-specific DCI on the PDCCH, so that the target user equipment can obtain the CRI or CSI-RS port index included therein by decoding the received DCI, and then determine the mapping relationship with the known mapping relationship. Interfering with the DMRS configuration of the UE.
  • indication information for example, CRI
  • indication information for example, CSI-RS port index
  • the apparatus 1200 may further include a mapping relationship configuration unit 1206.
  • the mapping relationship configuration unit 1206 may be configured to generate, for the target user equipment, information indicating a mapping relationship between the interference measurement resource or the antenna port for transmitting the interference measurement resource and the DMRS configuration, and the control base station transmits the information indicating the mapping relationship And to the target user equipment, for the user equipment to determine the DMRS configuration of the interfering UE in the group based on the CSI-RS resource or port indicated by the mapping relationship and the control information.
  • the mapping relationship configuration unit 1206 can configure, for example, the mapping relationship described with reference to FIG. 8 by higher layer signaling.
  • the mapping relationship is included in the RRC signaling for transmission to the target user equipment.
  • mapping relationship configuration unit 1206 is optional (shown in phantom in Figure 12). In the case where the mapping relationship is pre-configured and stored in the memory on the user equipment side, the user equipment can directly read the mapping relationship from the memory, so that the mapping relationship configuration unit 1206 can be omitted.
  • FIG. 14 is a flowchart illustrating a signaling interaction procedure for implementing the second example scheme, according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • step S1401 the base station configures, for example, M NZP CSI-RS resources and CSI-RS resources or CSI-RS ports and DMRS ports to the user equipment k through RRC signaling. The mapping relationship between them. Then, in step S1402, the base station transmits a downlink reference signal CSI-RS to the user equipment k based on the M NZP CSI-RS resources. The user equipment k measures the M NZ CSI-RS resources, and reports the MU-CQI as a measurement result to the base station in step S1403.
  • the user equipment k can report all M MU-CQIs to the base station, or only report the MU-CQI, for example, greater than a predetermined threshold.
  • the base station integrates the MU-CQI reported by the multiple user equipments to perform MU-MIMO transmission scheduling to select one NZP CSI-RS resource from the M NZP CSI-RS resources, and in step S1404, the user equipment k itself is configured by, for example, DCI.
  • the DMRS configuration and control information including CRI such as the selected CSI-RS resource is transmitted to the user equipment k.
  • the base station performs downlink data transmission to a group of user equipments including the user equipment k on the same time-frequency resource.
  • the user equipment k can learn the DMRS configuration of itself and other UEs in the group by decoding the received DCI, and then demodulate the received data information according to the information.
  • the signaling interaction process described above with reference to FIG. 14 is merely an example and not a limitation, and those skilled in the art may modify the above interaction process according to the principles of the above disclosure and the actual situation.
  • the various steps numbered in FIG. 14 are for convenience of description and are not meant to limit the order of execution.
  • some interaction processes that are less relevant to the techniques of the present disclosure are omitted in the above-described flowcharts.
  • the base station may not notify the user equipment of the mapping relationship in the above-described step S1401. All such modifications are considered to fall within the scope of the present disclosure and are not enumerated herein.
  • the interference measurement resource is indirectly utilized by utilizing the existing interference measurement resource-based multi-user interference measurement and pre-establishing a mapping relationship between the interference measurement resource or the corresponding antenna port and the DMRS configuration. Instructing the target user equipment to the DMRS configuration corresponding to the interference data stream in the MU-MIMO transmission enables the user equipment to learn the relevant interference information to achieve "non-transparent" MU-MIMO without significantly increasing the processing load and signaling overhead. Transmission helps optimize system performance.
  • a DMRS configuration indirectly notifying a MU-MIMO transmission based on a Transmission Configuration Indicator (TCI) mechanism is proposed.
  • TCI Transmission Configuration Indicator
  • the two antenna ports can be represented as quasi co-location (QCL) if the predetermined conditions are met.
  • the predetermined condition is that the wide-area characteristic of the transmission channel carrying the symbols in an antenna port can be inferred from the transmission channel carrying the symbols in the other antenna ports.
  • Wide-area characteristics include delay spread, Doppler spread, Doppler shift, average gain, average delay, and/or spatial reception.
  • TCI is a mechanism that supports a base station to notify a user equipment of a QCL relationship. The following briefly introduces the existing TCI mechanism.
  • the base station configures M for each UE by UE-specific RRC.
  • the M TCI states include ⁇ downlink reference signal 1
  • downlink reference signal 2 and CSI-RS port 3015 are quasi co-locations of QCL_type2, and so on.
  • the downlink reference signal may include a CSI-RS, a CRS, a DMRS, and the like; and the QCL_type indicates a quasi-co-location type.
  • QCL type A Doppler shift, Doppler spread, average delay, delay spread (frequency domain and time domain);
  • QCL type B Doppler shift, Doppler spread (frequency domain);
  • QCL type C average delay, Doppler shift (simplified frequency and time domain);
  • QCL type D spatial reception (space).
  • a third example aspect of the present disclosure proposes to indirectly indicate a DMRS configuration of a MU-MIMO transmission group to a user equipment using the TCI mechanism described above.
  • a configuration example of the user equipment side and the base station side for implementing the third exemplary scheme will be separately described below in detail.
  • 15 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 1500 may include a determining unit 1502 and a decoding unit 1504.
  • the functional configuration example of the decoding unit 1504 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the decoding unit 304 described above with reference to Fig. 3, and will not be repeated here.
  • the determining unit 1502 may include a TCI configuration obtaining module 1521 and a DMRS configuration determining module 1522.
  • the TCI configuration acquisition module 1521 can be configured to obtain a TCI configuration including a first number of TCI states from the base station.
  • Each TCI state in the TCI configuration includes a DMRS configuration and a quasi co-location type indication, the quasi co-location type indication being used to indicate that the DMRS configuration is an interfering DMRS configuration in MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the base station may configure, by the user-specific RRC, a TCI configuration including, for example, a first number of (here denoted M) TCI states for indicating M DMRS ports available for MU-MIMO transmission.
  • M a first number of (here denoted M) TCI states for indicating M DMRS ports available for MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the TCI state in the TCI configuration is used to indicate the interfering DMRS configuration in the MU-MIMO transmission, rather than to represent the QCL relationship between the two antenna ports. Therefore, as an example implementation, in addition to the existing four quasi co-location types QCL types A to D, a quasi co-location type may be added, for example, labeled QCL type E, for distinguishing from existing ones. TCI use.
  • the configured M TCI states may include ⁇ DMRS 1
  • the quasi co-location type included in each TCI state may also be defaulted, and information such as 1 bit is added to the RRC signaling. Indicates whether the configured TCI is used to indicate QCL or for MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the TCI configuration obtaining module 1521 on the user equipment side can obtain the M TCI states configured for MU-MIMO transmission by decoding the high layer RRC signaling from the base station, and learn the DMRS ports indicated by the M TCI states. May be used as an interference port in MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the DMRS configuration determining module 1522 may be configured to determine a DMRS configuration corresponding to the used TCI state in the configured first number of TCI states based on information indicating a usage configuration of the TCI state included in the control information from the base station. DMRS configuration for other user devices.
  • the base station may generate, according to the DMRS configuration of other UEs that are scheduled to perform MU-MIMO transmission simultaneously, which DMRS configurations corresponding to which TCI states are configured in the configured M TCI states are used as other Configuration information of the DMRS configuration of the UE.
  • the usage configuration information may be information indicating that the DMRS configuration included in the M TCI states is used as the number of TCI states of the interference DMRS configuration in the MU-MIMO transmission, and is included in The UE-specific DCI is sent to the user equipment, so that the DMRS configuration determining module 1522 on the user equipment side can read in order according to a predetermined order (for example, reading from large to small, reading from small to large, or reading from beginning to end, etc.) And sequentially reading the TCI state indicated by the use configuration information from the configured M TCI states, and determining the DMRS configuration corresponding to the read TCI state as the interference DMRS configuration.
  • a predetermined order for example, reading from large to small, reading from small to large, or reading from beginning to end, etc.
  • the usage configuration information may be information in the form of a bitmap, for example, the used DMRS port is represented as 1 in the bitmap, and the unused DMRS port is represented in the bitmap as 0.
  • the usage configuration information may be sent to the user equipment in the UE-specific DCI, so that the DMRS configuration determining module 1522 on the user equipment side may obtain the bitmap information by decoding the DCI from the base station, and the bitmap information is The DMRS port corresponding to the TCI state labeled "1" is determined to be an interfering DMRS port.
  • the user equipment can perform corresponding interference cancellation and data demodulation, thereby implementing "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission by means of the TCI mechanism.
  • the bits of the information used to indicate the usage configuration of the TCI state in the DCI may be fixed to facilitate demodulation of the physical layer signaling by the user equipment.
  • the configuration information when used to indicate the number of TCI states used, it may be fixed to, for example, 3 bits, so that up to 8 interfering DMRS configurations may be indicated.
  • the configuration information when used as bitmap information, it can be fixed to, for example, 8 bits.
  • M is less than 8
  • the insufficient number of bits in the bitmap information indicating the usage configuration of the M TCI states can be complemented, for example, by 0.
  • the base station may first utilize the user-specific MAC layer control element (MAC CE).
  • This activation operation can also be implemented in the form of, for example, a bitmap.
  • the activated TCI state is represented as 1, and the inactive TCI state is represented as 0.
  • the base station uses the DCI of the physical layer to notify the target user equipment of the usage configuration of the activated N TCI states in the MU-MIMO transmission as described above.
  • the determining unit 1502 on the user equipment side may further include an activation configuration determining module 1523.
  • the activation configuration determination module 1523 can be configured to determine a second number of TCI states that are activated in the first number of TCI states based on information from the base station indicating an activation configuration of the TCI state.
  • the second number is eight.
  • the activation configuration determining module 1523 may acquire the activation configuration information in the form of a bitmap of the TCI state by decoding the MAC CE from the base station, and determine the TCI state corresponding to the bit "1" as the activated TCI state.
  • the activation configuration determination module 1523 can determine, for example, eight TCI states that are activated in the M TCI states.
  • the information indicating the usage configuration of the TCI state from the base station may be information indicating the usage configuration of the activated 8 TCI states.
  • it may be information indicating the number of TCI states for MU-MIMO transmission in the 8 TCI states (3 bits), or may indicate whether each of the 8 TCI states is used for MU-, respectively.
  • the DMRS configuration determining module 1522 can read the indicated number of TCI states in a predetermined order from the activated 8 TCI states according to the usage configuration information, and corresponding thereto
  • the DMRS configuration is determined to be an interfering DMRS configuration; or the DMRS configuration determining module 1522 may determine, as the other user equipment, the DMRS configuration corresponding to the TCI state marked as "1" among the activated 8 TCI states according to the 8-bit bitmap information.
  • DMRS configuration is determined to be an interfering DMRS configuration; or the DMRS configuration determining module 1522 may determine, as the other user equipment, the DMRS configuration corresponding to the TCI state marked as "1" among the activated 8 TCI states according to the 8-bit bitmap information.
  • the activation configuration determination module 1523 is optional (shown in phantom in Figure 15). In the case where M is less than or equal to 8, the base station does not need to perform an activation operation by using the MAC CE, so that the user equipment side does not need to set the activation configuration determination module 1523.
  • 16 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the device 1620 may include a control information generating unit 1630 and a transmission control unit 1640.
  • the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 1640 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 404 described above with reference to FIG. 4, and will not be repeated here.
  • the control information generating unit 1630 may further include a TCI configuration generating module 1631, a usage configuration information generating module 1632, and a control information generating module 1633.
  • the TCI configuration generation module 1631 can be configured to generate a TCI configuration including a first number of TCI states and control the base station to transmit the TCI configuration to the target user equipment.
  • each TCI state includes a DMRS configuration and a quasi co-location type indication, the quasi co-location type indication being used to indicate that the DMRS configuration is an interfering DMRS configuration in MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the TCI configuration generation module 1631 may generate a TCI configuration including, for example, M TCI states, and include the TCI configuration in, for example, user-specific RRC signaling to be transmitted to the target user equipment.
  • the configured M TCI states may include ⁇ DMRS 1
  • the usage configuration information generation module 1632 may be configured to generate information indicating a usage configuration of the first number of TCI states according to a DMRS configuration of the interfering UEs other than the target UE among the group of user equipments performing the MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the usage configuration information may be information indicating a number of TCI states in which the DMRS configuration included in the first number of TCI states is used as an interference DMRS configuration in MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the information indicating the usage configuration of the TCI state may be bitmap information.
  • the usage configuration information generation module 1632 may generate the bitmap information by marking the other unused TCI status as 0 by marking the TCI status corresponding to the DMRS configuration of the interfering UE as one.
  • the control information generation module 1633 can be configured to generate control information by including the generated information indicating the usage configuration of the TCI state.
  • the usage configuration information may be sent to the target UE in the user-specific DCI, for indirectly indicating the DMRS configuration of the interfering UE in the MU-MIMO transmission group to the target UE, and then performing interference cancellation and data solution by the target UE. Tuned to recover the target data stream, thus achieving "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission.
  • control information generating unit 1630 may further include an activation configuration information generating module 1634.
  • the activation configuration information generation module 1634 can be configured to activate a second number of TCI states from the first number of TCI states and generate activation configuration information indicative of the activated second number of TCI states.
  • the base station may first N (for example, N is 8) TCI states are activated in the M TCI states, and the activation operation is indicated by activation configuration information such as a bitmap form.
  • activation configuration information such as a bitmap form.
  • the activated TCI state is represented as 1 in the bitmap information
  • the unactivated TCI state is represented as 0 in the bitmap information.
  • the bitmap form of activation configuration information may be included in the user-specific MAC CE being sent to the target UE.
  • the usage configuration information generation module 1632 can generate usage configuration information indicating the usage status of the activated TCI state according to the DMRS configuration of the interfering UE in the MU-MIMO transmission. For example, information indicating the number of TCI states for MU-MIMO transmission in the activated N TCI states is generated. For another example, in the activated N TCI states, the TCI state corresponding to the interfering DMRS configuration is marked as 1, and the unused TCI state is marked as 0, thereby generating N-bit bitmap information.
  • the target UE can determine the DMRS configuration of the interfering UE according to the activation configuration information received from the MAC layer and the usage configuration information received from the physical layer, thereby performing interference cancellation and data demodulation.
  • the activation configuration information generation module 1634 described above is optional (shown in phantom in Figure 16). In the case where the number of TCI states configured by RRC is less than or equal to, for example, 8, the activation operation may be omitted, so that it is also unnecessary to set the activation configuration information generation module 1634.
  • the configuration example of the base station side described herein with reference to FIG. 16 corresponds to the configuration example on the user equipment side described above, and therefore the content not described in detail herein can be referred to the description of the corresponding position above, and is no longer described here. repeat.
  • FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a signaling interaction procedure for implementing a third example scheme according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • step S1701 the base station configures a TCI configuration for MU-MIMO transmission including, for example, M TCI states to the user equipment k by RRC signaling.
  • step S1702 the base station activates N TCI states from the M TCI states, and transmits information indicating the activation configuration of the TCI state to the user equipment k in the MAC CE.
  • step S1703 the base station transmits a downlink reference signal CSI-RS to the user equipment k to acquire channel state information, and the user equipment k transmits the measured channel state information to the base station in step S1704.
  • CSI-RS downlink reference signal
  • step S1705 the base station performs MU-MIMO transmission scheduling based on the channel state information reported by the user equipment k and other user equipments in combination with specific network conditions, thereby generating an indication of the use in the activated N TCI states according to the scheduling result.
  • the configured information is included in, for example, the DCI for transmission to the user equipment k to indicate to the user equipment k the interfering DMRS configuration in the MU-MIMO transmission.
  • step S1706 the base station transmits information including the DMRS configuration of the user equipment k to the user equipment k through the DCI.
  • step S1707 the base station simultaneously performs downlink data transmission to a group of user equipments including the user equipment k on the same transmission resource.
  • the user equipment k can learn the DMRS configuration of itself and other UEs in the group by decoding the received DCI, and then demodulate the received data information according to the information.
  • the signaling interaction process described above with reference to FIG. 17 is merely an example and not a limitation, and those skilled in the art may modify the above interaction process according to the principles of the above disclosure and the actual situation.
  • the various steps numbered in FIG. 17 are merely for convenience of description and are not meant to limit the order of execution.
  • the DCI including the usage configuration information of the TCI state and the DCI including the DMRS configuration of the user equipment k itself transmitted in steps S1705 and S1706, respectively are described above, but this is only for explaining that the UE k can directly include the TCI.
  • the use of the configuration information of the state can push out the interference DMRS configuration without resorting to the DMRS configuration of the UE k itself.
  • these two steps can be performed simultaneously, that is, the two pieces of information can be transmitted in the same DCI.
  • some interaction processes that are less relevant to the techniques of the present disclosure are omitted in the above-described flowcharts.
  • some of the steps in FIG. 17 can also be omitted.
  • the activation operation in the above step S1702 may be omitted (shown in broken lines in FIG. 17). All such modifications are considered to fall within the scope of the present disclosure and are not enumerated herein.
  • the processing load and the signaling overhead can be significantly increased.
  • the user equipment can learn relevant interference information to implement “non-transparent” MU-MIMO transmission, which is beneficial to optimize system performance.
  • the fourth exemplary solution of the present disclosure it is proposed to indirectly notify the MU-MIMO transmission group based on the DMRS configuration of the target user equipment itself and related information of a Code Division Multiplexing (CDM) group in which the DMRS configuration is located. Interference DMRS configuration.
  • CDM Code Division Multiplexing
  • the DMRS is constructed using an orthogonal sequence (orthogonal code) using a Walsh code and a scrambling sequence based on a pseudo random sequence.
  • the downlink DMRS (DL-DMRS) is independent for each antenna port and can be multiplexed within the respective resource block pair.
  • the DL-DMRS uses CDM and/or Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) to be in a mutually orthogonal relationship between antenna ports.
  • the DL-DMRS is code division multiplexed in the CDM group by orthogonal codes, respectively.
  • the DL-DMRS is frequency-multiplexed with each other among CDM groups.
  • the DL-DMRSs in the same CDM group are mapped to the same resource elements, respectively.
  • the DL-DMRS in the same CDM group uses different orthogonal sequences between the antenna ports, and these orthogonal sequences are in a mutually orthogonal relationship.
  • the DL-DMRS for the downlink data channel PDSCH can use a part or all of up to 12 antenna ports (antenna ports 1000 to 1011). That is, in the case of single-user-multiple-input multiple-output (SU-MIMO) transmission, the PDSCH associated with the DL-DMRS can perform MIMO transmission up to 8 ranks; in MU-MIMO transmission In this case, each UE is assigned a maximum of 4 ranks, and all UEs add up to a maximum of 12 ranks.
  • SU-MIMO single-user-multiple-input multiple-output
  • the DL-DMRS for the downlink control channel PDCCH uses, for example, part or all of four antenna ports (antenna ports 1007 to 1010). .
  • the DL-DMRS can change the spread coding length of the CDM and the number of mapped resource elements according to the rank number of the channel to be associated.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mapping pattern of DMRS ports 7 to 10 on resource elements (RE), in which shaded squares are respectively indicated at antenna ports 7 to 10 (ie, DMRS port 7) Up to 10) the resource element to which it is mapped.
  • DMRS ports 7 and 8 in the same CDM group are mapped to the same resource element, thereby using codewords [+1+) in the CDM group CDM4, respectively. 1+1+1] and codeword [+1-1+1-1];
  • DMRS ports 9 and 10 are mapped to the same resource element, thereby using codewords [+1+1+) in CMD group CDM4, respectively 1+1] and codeword [+1-1+1-1].
  • the base station can notify the target UE of the codeword usage of all or part of the CDM group in which it is located by, for example, DCI, thereby indirectly notifying each DMRS port in the MU- Usage in MIMO transmission.
  • the base station allocates the DMRS port 7 to the target UE through the DCI and informs the target UE that all the codewords in the CDM group are used by the MU-MIMO transmission DMRS port, the target UE can infer the CDM4.
  • the other DMRS ports 8, 11, 13 in the group are interference ports in the MU-MIMO transmission, and then perform interference cancellation and data demodulation to recover the target data stream, thereby implementing "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission.
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 1900 may include a determining unit 1902 and a decoding unit 1904.
  • the functional configuration example of the decoding unit 1904 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the decoding unit 304 described above with reference to FIG. 3, and will not be repeated here.
  • the determining unit 1902 may further include a DMRS configuration set determining module 1921 and an interference DMRS configuration determining module 1922.
  • the DMRS configuration set determining module 1921 may be configured to determine a DMRS configuration set corresponding to a CDM group for MU-MIMO transmission.
  • NR currently supports CDM2, CDM4, and CDM8.
  • the base station may notify the target UE of which CDM group, ie, CDM2, CDM4, and CDM8, in which the DMRS port configured for the UE is located, for example, by user-specific high-layer RRC signaling.
  • the target UE ie, CDM2, CDM4, and CDM8 in which the DMRS port configured for the UE is located, for example, by user-specific high-layer RRC signaling.
  • the RRC layer if the type of DMRS configuration is determined, the relationship between the DMRS and the CDM group is also determined. For example, in general, for DMRS associated with PDSCH, CDM4 is mainly supported.
  • the DMRS configuration set determining module 1921 on the user equipment side can learn the CDM group for the MU-MIMO transmission of the data channel by decoding the high layer signaling from the base station, and thereby uniquely determine the DMRS configuration corresponding to the CDM group. set.
  • the interference DMRS configuration determination module 1922 may be configured to determine a DMRS configuration of other user equipments that are interference DMRS configurations according to configuration information of the CDM group included in the control information.
  • the configuration information of the CDM group may include information indicating whether the codewords therein are all used by the DMRS port of the MU-MIMO transmission. For example, it can be indicated by 1 bit of information, 1 indicates that all are used, and 0 indicates only partial use.
  • the interference DMRS configuration determining module 1922 may determine other DMRS configurations of the DMRS configuration different from the target UE in the DMRS configuration set as the interference DMRS configuration when determining that the codewords in the CDM group are all used according to the configuration information.
  • the configuration information indicates that the codewords in the CDM group are not all used, then further information needs to be combined to determine which codewords are used and which are not used to determine the interfering DMRS configuration.
  • the configuration information of the CDM group included in the control information from the base station may be information indicating a codeword occupancy situation in the CDM group.
  • the information may preferably be information in the form of a bitmap, for example, a codeword occupied by a DMRS port represents 1 in a bitmap, and a codeword not occupied by a DMRS port is represented as 0 in a bitmap.
  • the bitmap information corresponding to CDM4 is "1010" it means that the codewords [+1 +1 +1 +1] and [+1 -1 +1 -1] in CDM4 are interfered by two.
  • the DMRS port is occupied, while the remaining two codewords [+1 +1 -1 -1] and [-1 +1 +1 -1] are not used.
  • the interference DMRS configuration determining module 1922 can further determine the occupied codewords in the CDM group according to the bitmap information included in the control information indicating the codeword occupancy in the CDM group, and further the DMRS configuration set and the occupied The DMRS port corresponding to the codeword is determined to be an interference DMRS port.
  • the scheme of the present disclosure can be applied to both the partial use of the CDM group and the full use of the CDM group.
  • the signaling overhead of the bitmap information can also be saved by indicating with information "1" of, for example, 1 bit, which is particularly noticeable in the case of CDM4 and CDM8. Therefore, in actual implementation, the two information notification methods can also be combined.
  • the interfering DMRS configuration may be directly derived according to the DMRS configuration of the target UE; otherwise, when the CDM group is not fully used according to the 1-bit information, Bitmap information indicating the specific usage of the CDM group to determine the interfering DMRS configuration.
  • 20 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 2000 may include a control information generating unit 2002 and a transmission control unit 2004.
  • the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 2004 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 404 described above with reference to FIG. 4, and will not be repeated here.
  • the control information generating unit 2002 may further include a configuration information generating module 2021 and a control information generating module 2022.
  • the configuration information generating module 2021 may be configured to generate configuration information of a CDM group for MU-MIMO transmission according to a DMRS configuration of a group of user equipments that perform MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the configuration information may be used to indicate whether the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the CDM group is all used for the MU-MIMO transmission, that is, whether the codewords in the CDM group are all transmitted by MU-MIMO. Interference with DMRS port usage. For example, 1 means that all are used, and 0 means that only part is used.
  • the control information generation module 2022 may be configured to generate control information for indirectly indicating an interfering DMRS configuration in the MU-MIMO transmission by including configuration information of the CDM group and a DMRS configuration of the target UE.
  • the control information may be sent to the target UE through, for example, a user-specific DCI of the physical layer. Therefore, the target UE may, according to the received control information, in the case where the configuration information indicates that the CDM group is all used, another DMRS configuration different from its own DMRS configuration in the DMRS configuration set corresponding to the CDM group. Determined to interfere with the DMRS configuration.
  • the configuration information generated by the configuration information generation module 2021 may include bitmap information for indicating codeword usage in the CDM group. For example, 1 indicates that the codeword is used by the interfering DMRS port, and 0 indicates that the codeword is not used by the DMRS port.
  • the control information generating module 2022 may generate control information by including configuration information in the form of the bitmap, and transmit the control information to the target UE through, for example, a user-specific DCI of the physical layer to indirectly indicate the interference DMRS configuration to the target UE.
  • the apparatus 2000 may further comprise a CDM group configuration unit 2006 for configuring the target UE with a CDM group for its MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the CDM group configuration unit 2006 may be configured to generate, for the target UE, indication information of the CDM group for MU-MIMO transmission for indicating which one of CDM2, CDM4, and CDM4 is used.
  • the indication information may be sent to the target UE in, for example, higher layer RRC signaling.
  • configuration information such as the above-described bitmap form for indicating codeword usage in the CDM group included in the DCI may have different lengths. Therefore, the user equipment can interpret the bitmap information of different lengths in the DCI according to the RRC configuration by using the DM configuration to notify the user equipment of the CDM group in advance, thereby avoiding information demodulation failure.
  • the configuration example of the base station side described herein with reference to FIG. 20 is corresponding to the configuration example of the user equipment side described above, and therefore, the content that is not described in detail herein can be referred to the description of the corresponding location above, and is not repeated here. .
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a signaling interaction procedure for implementing the fourth example scheme, according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • step S2101 the base station configures a CDM group for MU-MIMO transmission to the user equipment k through RRC signaling. Then, in step S2102, the base station transmits a downlink reference signal CSI-RS to the user equipment k to acquire channel state information, and the user equipment k transmits the measured channel state information to the base station in step S2103. Then, in step S2104, the base station performs MU-MIMO transmission scheduling based on the channel state information reported by the user equipment k and other user equipments in combination with the specific network conditions, thereby generating configuration information indicating the CDM group according to the scheduling result, and configuring the configuration.
  • CSI-RS downlink reference signal
  • step S2104 the base station performs MU-MIMO transmission scheduling based on the channel state information reported by the user equipment k and other user equipments in combination with the specific network conditions, thereby generating configuration information indicating the CDM group according to the scheduling result, and configuring the configuration.
  • the information and the DMRS configuration of the user equipment k are included, for example, in the DCI to be sent to the user equipment k.
  • the configuration information may include 1-bit information indicating whether codewords in the CDM group are all used, and/or bitmap information indicating a specific use case of codewords in the CDM group to indicate MU-MIMO to the user equipment k Interference DMRS configuration in transmission.
  • the base station simultaneously performs downlink data transmission to a group of user equipments including the user equipment k on the same transmission resource.
  • the user equipment k can learn the DMRS configuration of itself and other UEs in the group by decoding the received DCI, and then demodulate the received data information according to the information.
  • the DMRS configuration of the target UE and the usage of the CDM group in which the UE is located are notified to the target UE by utilizing the determined correspondence relationship between the DMRS configurations of the respective types and the CDM group, so that The user equipment is informed of relevant interference information to achieve "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission without significantly increasing the processing load and signaling overhead, which is beneficial to optimize system performance.
  • non-transparent MU implementing the downlink data channel by indirectly notifying the user equipment of the interference condition of the MU-MIMO transmission according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure is described above in connection with the first to fourth example schemes. - MIMO transmission, but it should be understood that these exemplary embodiments are only preferred embodiments and are not limiting, and those skilled in the art may also make appropriate modifications or combinations of the above embodiments according to the principles of the present disclosure. Within the scope of this disclosure.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission with respect to the downlink control channel will be described below.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission of the downlink control channel is to superimpose the downlink control channel (ie, UE-specific PDCCH) for multiple different user equipments on the same time-frequency resource, so as to improve time-frequency resources. Utilization efficiency.
  • control channel ie, UE-specific PDCCH
  • UE-specific PDCCH UE-specific PDCCH
  • the MU-MIMO transmission of its data channel can be carried by the control signal of the target UE's control channel UE-specific PDCCH (for example, UE-specific DCI) assists, for example, including relevant control information for the MU-MIMO transmission of the data channel (including the DMRS configuration of the target UE and information indicating the interfering DMRS configuration directly or indirectly) in the UE-specific DCI.
  • UE-specific PDCCH for example, UE-specific DCI
  • the control channel cannot be used to provide relevant control information about its own MU-MIMO transmission, ie, the UE-specific PDCCH corresponding to the target UE.
  • the DMRS configuration and optionally the DMRS configuration corresponding to the UE-specific PDCCH of other UEs Based on the problems faced, the prior art has not proposed any scheme that can effectively implement MU-MIMO transmission of a control channel.
  • a group shared PDCCH (Group Common PDCCH, also abbreviated as GC-PDCCH) is supported to carry information about a slot structure, for example, a slot format indicator (SFI).
  • SFI slot format indicator
  • the CSS is that all UEs can try blind decoding, and the user-specific search space attempts blind decoding only if the UE is configured in advance.
  • the GC-PDCCH in the present disclosure may be located in the CSS to be easily decoded by UEs among a group of UEs.
  • the GC-PDCCH includes not only slot information such as SFI but also control information for MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel.
  • the base station can configure the time-frequency resource available to the GC-PDCCH for the user equipment by using the RRC, and the user equipment receives the GC-PDCCH by detecting on the corresponding time-frequency resource, and acquires the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel from the GC-PDCCH.
  • the control information further recovers its own UE-specific PDCCH from the received superimposed signal stream based on the control information.
  • Such a structure for transmitting a GC-PDCCH and a UE-specific PDCCH to a user equipment may also be referred to as a dual-stage DCI structure.
  • a signaling interaction flow diagram of a two-level DCI structure for implementing MU-MIMO transmission of a control channel will be briefly described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.
  • step S2201 the base station transmits a downlink reference signal CSI-RS to the user equipment k to acquire channel state information, and the user equipment k transmits the measured channel state information to the base station in step S2202.
  • step S2203 the base station performs MU-MIMO transmission scheduling based on the channel state information reported by the user equipment k and other user equipments in combination with specific network conditions, and transmits a GC-PDCCH to the user equipment k according to the scheduling result (this is the first Level 1 DCI), the GC-PDCCH includes SFI and control information about MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel.
  • step S2204 the base station transmits its exclusive UE-specific PDCCH (this is the second level DCI) to the user equipment k.
  • the UE-specific PDCCH is superimposed on the same time-frequency resource with the UE-specific PDCCH of other user equipments in the MU-MIMO transmission group, and thus the signal received by the user equipment is not itself.
  • step S2205 the base station transmits a data stream to the user equipment k, which is superimposed and transmitted with the data streams of other user equipments in the MU-MIMO transmission group.
  • the user equipment k may first recover its own UE-specific PDCCH from the received superposed signal stream according to the received control information about the MU-MIMO transmission included in the GC-PDCCH, and further according to the UE-specific
  • the control information about the MU-MIMO transmission of the data channel included in the PDDCH recovers the target data stream from the received superimposed data stream.
  • How to demodulate the target data stream according to the control information about the MU-MIMO transmission of the data channel included in the UE-specific PDCCH can be referred to the solution in the foregoing first embodiment, or other solutions in the prior art can also be used. A detailed discussion will not be made in this embodiment.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel and the MU-MIMO transmission of the data channel are described, but this is only an example and not a limitation, and the two can of course be independent. existing. It should also be noted that even if the two exist at the same time, the MU-MIMO mode of the control channel can be different from the MU-MIMO mode of the data channel. For example, suppose that the UE-specific PDCCH of one user equipment has only one layer in MU-MIMO transmission, and the data information of the user equipment includes multiple layers in MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel may include only three layers, and each layer belongs to one UE; and the MU-MIMO transmission of the data channel may include six layers, each The UEs include two layers of data streams.
  • the DMRS configuration (also referred to as PDCCH-associated DMRS configuration) for transmitting the PDCCH and the DMRS configuration (also referred to as PDSCH-associated DMRS configuration) for transmitting the PDSCH may themselves be different.
  • the DMRS associated with the PDCCH is transmitted using one or more of the antenna ports 107-114, and the DMRS associated with the PDSCH is transmitted using one or more of the antenna ports 7-14.
  • the number of layers that the UE-specific PDCCH of one user equipment can occupy in the MU-MIMO transmission is not limited herein, and may be one layer or multiple layers, that is, there may be one slot in one slot.
  • FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 2300 may include a MU-MIMO transmission control information acquiring unit 2302 and a dedicated transmission control information acquiring unit 2304.
  • each of the above functional units and modules may be implemented as a separate physical entity, or may also be implemented by a single entity (eg, a processor (CPU or DSP, etc.), an integrated circuit, etc.), which is equally applicable to subsequent Description of other configuration examples on the user device side.
  • a processor CPU or DSP, etc.
  • an integrated circuit etc.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission control information acquiring unit 2302 may be configured to decode a GC-PDCCH for a group of user equipments including the target user equipment to acquire control information about MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel of the group of user equipments.
  • the GC-PDCCH from the base station may include control information for performing MU-MIMO transmission on a UE-specific PDCCH of each group of user equipment, and the control information may include, for example, a UE-specific PDCCH with each user equipment.
  • Corresponding DMRS configuration related information including a DMRS port number, a scrambling ID, and a layer number; or may be a pseudo random sequence for generating a DMRS and corresponding orthogonal cover code (OCC) information.
  • the dedicated transmission control information acquiring unit 2304 may be configured to UE-specific of the target UE that is transmitted on the same transmission resource as the UE-specific PDCCH of other user equipments according to the acquired control information of the MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the PDCCH is decoded to acquire transmission control information about the target UE.
  • the DMRS associated with the PDCCH is transmitted using a subframe and a frequency band for transmitting a PDCCH associated with the DMRS.
  • the DMRS is used to perform demodulation of the PDCCH associated with the DMRS.
  • the PDCCH is transmitted using an antenna port for transmitting the DMRS.
  • the target UE after knowing the DMRS configuration corresponding to the UE-specific PDCCH of the target UE, the target UE can recover its own UE-specific PDCCH from the received superposed signal stream to obtain
  • the transmission control information specific to the target UE the dedicated transmission control information may be used for transmission control on a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH) and a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH), and may also be used in future for a side link.
  • PDSCH physical downlink shared channel
  • PUSCH physical uplink shared channel
  • Transmission control for example, transmission control for a straight-through link-shared channel (SL-SCH), a physical straight-through link control channel (PSCCH), etc., where the so-called transmission control includes resource allocation, transmission format/modulation coding format, hybrid automatic Retransmission request (HARQ) information, DMRS allocation, and the like.
  • SL-SCH straight-through link-shared channel
  • PSCCH physical straight-through link control channel
  • HARQ hybrid automatic Retransmission request
  • the device 2300 on the user equipment side described above may be implemented at the chip level, or may also be implemented at the device level.
  • device 2300 can operate as a user device itself, and can also include external devices such as a memory, a transceiver (optional, shown in dashed boxes in Figure 23), and the like.
  • the memory can be used to store programs and related data information that the user device needs to perform to implement various functions.
  • the transceiver may include one or more communication interfaces to support communication with different devices (e.g., base stations, other user equipment, etc.), and implementations of the transceivers are not specifically limited herein. The same applies to the subsequent description of other configuration examples on the user equipment side.
  • the present disclosure also provides a configuration example of the following base station side.
  • 24 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the device 2400 may include a control channel generating unit 2402 and a transmission control unit 2404.
  • each of the above functional units or modules may be implemented as a separate physical entity, or may also be implemented by a single entity (eg, a processor (CPU or DSP, etc.), an integrated circuit, etc.), which is equally applicable to subsequent Description of other configuration examples on the base station side.
  • a processor CPU or DSP, etc.
  • an integrated circuit etc.
  • the control channel generating unit 2402 may be configured to generate a user-specific physical downlink control channel (UE-specific PDCCH) for a group shared physical downlink control channel (GC-PDCCH) for a group of user equipments and each user equipment in a group of user equipments.
  • UE-specific PDCCH user-specific physical downlink control channel
  • GC-PDCCH group shared physical downlink control channel
  • the control information may include, for example, UE-specific PDCCH of each user equipment Corresponding DMRS configuration.
  • the transmission control unit 2404 may be configured to transmit the generated GC-PDCCH to a group of user equipments, and control base stations simultaneously on the same transmission resource based on control information about MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel in the GC-PDCCH
  • the respective UE-specific PDCCHs are transmitted to the respective user equipments.
  • the above-mentioned base station side device 2400 can be implemented at the chip level, or can also be implemented at the device level.
  • device 2400 can operate as a base station itself, and can also include external devices such as a memory, a transceiver (optionally shown in dashed boxes in Figure 24), and the like.
  • the memory can be used to store programs and related data information that the base station needs to perform to implement various functions.
  • the transceiver may include one or more communication interfaces to support communication with different devices (eg, user equipment, other base stations, etc.), and implementations of the transceiver are not specifically limited herein. The same applies to the subsequent description of other configuration examples on the base station side.
  • the GC-PDCCH includes control information about MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel in addition to slot information such as SFI.
  • the GC-PDCCH is for all UEs, that is, all UEs try to decode the GC-PDCCH, and the MU-MIMO transmission control information included therein is only for the MU to be controlled for its control channel.
  • a group of user equipment for MIMO transmission Therefore, preferably, in order to prevent other UEs other than the group of UEs from decoding the control information, it is considered to scramble the content.
  • the existing DCI scrambling technique will be briefly described below.
  • a Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) parity bit is added to the DCI.
  • the CRC parity bit is scrambled by a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI).
  • RNTI Radio Network Temporary Identifier
  • the RNTI is an identifier that can be specified or set according to the purpose of the DCI or the like.
  • the RNTI is an identifier set in advance according to a standard, an identifier set as information specific to a cell, an identifier set as information dedicated to a terminal device, or a group-specific information belonging to a terminal device. Identifier.
  • the terminal apparatus descrambles the CRC parity added to the DCI with a predetermined RNTI to identify whether the CRC is correct. In the case where the CRC is correct, it is known that the DCI is the DCI for the terminal device.
  • a scrambled group-shared identifier dedicated to control information of MU-MIMO transmission of a control channel dedicated to the GC-PDCCH is designed.
  • the scrambled object according to the set of shared identifiers may be referred to as, for example, a MU-PDCCH RNTI or a MU-MIMO RNTI to distinguish it from an RNTI for other purposes.
  • an identifier for scrambling of SFI in a GC-PDCCH may be referred to as an SFI RNTI.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram showing an example architecture of a GC-PDCCH and a relationship between a GC-PDCCH and a UE-specific PDDCH according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel includes 4 layers, as shown on the right side of FIG. 25, and the dedicated transmission control information for 4 UEs is superimposed in the UE-specific PDCCH received by the UE.
  • the transmission control information of UE1, UE2, UEk, and UEm is in order from top to bottom.
  • DMRS configuration (including the DMRS port number, scrambling ID, and number of layers) associated with each UE-specific PDCCH of UE1, UE2, UEk, and UEm. It is assumed that the DMRS configurations corresponding to UE 1, UE 2, UE k, and UE m are respectively referred to as DMRS configuration 1, DMRS configuration 2, DMRS configuration k, and DMRS configuration m.
  • DMRS configuration 1 including the DMRS port number, scrambling ID, and number of layers
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic diagram showing a first example aspect according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the DMRS configurations of UE1, UE2, UEk, and UEm included in the GC-PDCCH are scrambled by the MU-PDCCH RNTI, respectively. Since the group sharing identifier MU-PDCCH RNTI is well-known to a group of user equipments performing MU-MIMO transmission (for example, the base station can configure the MU-PDCCH RNTI for user equipments that may participate in MU-MIMO transmission in advance by, for example, higher layer RRC signaling.
  • UE1, UE2, UEk, and UEm can all use the MU-PDCCH RNTI to descramble the scrambled GC-PDCCH, so that four DMRS configurations can be obtained.
  • each UE does not know which DMRS configuration is its own DMRS configuration, and which DMRS configurations are interference. Therefore, the user equipment can attempt to blindly decode the UE-specific PDCCH based on all obtained DMRS configurations, ie, perform different interference DMRS configuration assumptions to try whether the UE-specific PDCCH can be decoded, and utilize the user-specific identifier (eg The cell radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI) verifies the decoded information.
  • the cell radio network temporary identifier C-RNTI The cell radio network temporary identifier
  • the CRC parity of the UE-specific PDCCH is descrambled by the C-RNTI to identify whether the CRC is correct. If the CRC is correct, the verification passes, indicating that the decoded information is exactly the transmission control information for the user itself.
  • the DMRS configuration of each user equipment in the MU-MIMO transmission group is scrambled by using the group sharing identifier MU-PDCCH RNTI.
  • This scrambling scheme can also be referred to as a "first-level scrambling scheme.”
  • Each user equipment can learn the full set of DMRS configurations by decoding the GC-PDCCH by using the MU-PDCCH RNTI, and decode the UE-specific PDCCH by performing interference cancellation based on different interference DMRS hypotheses, that is, the user equipment not only knows its own
  • the DMRS configuration, and knowing the DMRS configuration of the interfering UE, is therefore equivalent to a "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel.
  • FIG. 27 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 2700 may include a MU-MIMO transmission control information acquiring unit 2702 and a dedicated transmission control information acquiring unit 2704.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission control information acquiring unit 2702 may be configured to decode the GC-PDCCH from the base station using the group common identifier to acquire control information about the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission control information acquisition unit 2702 may further include an identifier acquisition module 2721 and a descrambling module 2722.
  • the identifier acquisition module 2721 may be configured to acquire a group common identifier (eg, MU-PDCCH RNTI) and a unique identifier of the user equipment (eg, C-RNTI) from the base station.
  • the descrambling module 2722 may be configured to decode the GC-PDCCH with the group common identifier MU-PDCCH RNTI to obtain control information about the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel of all user equipments included therein. Taking the configuration shown in FIG.
  • the descrambling module 2722 of the UE k may decode to obtain the DMRS configuration 1, the DMRS configuration 2, the DMRS configuration k, and the DMRS configuration m.
  • the dedicated transmission control information acquiring unit 2704 may be configured to decode the UE-specific PDCCH of the target user equipment based on the control information acquired by the MU-MIMO transmission control information acquiring unit 2702 and the specific identifier of the target user equipment to acquire Transmission control information of the target user equipment.
  • the dedicated transmission control information acquiring unit 2704 may further include a blind decoding module 2741 and a verification module 2742.
  • the blind decoding module 2741 may be configured to perform blind decoding on the UE-specific PDCCH of the target user equipment by processing the UE-specific PDCCH of other user equipments as interference based on the control information acquired by the MU-MIMO transmission control information acquiring unit 2702. .
  • the blind decoding module 2741 of the UE k may separately configure the acquired four DMRSs (including DMRS configuration 1, DMRS configuration 2, and DMRS configuration).
  • One DMRS configuration in k and DMRS configuration m) is assumed as its own DMRS configuration, and the remaining three DMRS configurations are assumed to be interfering DMRS configurations, so that the received UE-specific is received according to, for example, the linear interference cancellation method described above.
  • PDCCH decoding One DMRS configuration in k and DMRS configuration m) is assumed as its own DMRS configuration, and the remaining three DMRS configurations are assumed to be interfering DMRS configurations, so that the received UE-specific is received according to, for example, the linear interference cancellation method described above. PDCCH decoding.
  • the decoded information is the transmission control information for UE k. Therefore, verification is also required.
  • the verification module 2742 may be configured to utilize the unique identifier (eg, C-RNTI) of the UE k to verify the decoded information and obtain the decoded information passed by the verification as transmission control information about the target user equipment.
  • the unique identifier eg, C-RNTI
  • the UE k sequentially descrambles the CRC parity in the decoded transmission control information by using its own C-RNTI to identify whether the CRC is correct. If the CRC is correct, the verification is passed, indicating that this piece of transmission control information is for UE k.
  • FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the device 2800 may include a control channel generating unit 2802 and a transmission control unit 2804.
  • the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 2804 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 2404 described above with reference to FIG. 24, and will not be repeated here.
  • the control channel generating unit 2802 further includes a scrambling module 2821 and a notification module 2822.
  • the scrambling module 2821 may be configured to generate the GC-PDCCH by scrambling control information about the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel included in the GC-PDCCH by using a group sharing identifier (eg, MU-PDCCH RNTI).
  • a group sharing identifier eg, MU-PDCCH RNTI
  • the scrambling module 2821 performs scrambling on the four DMRS configurations (including DMRS configuration 1, DMRS configuration 2, DMRS configuration k, and DMRS configuration m) included in the GC-PDCCH by using the MU-PDCCH RNTI. To obtain the scrambled GC-PDCCH.
  • the notification module 2822 may be configured to control the base station to send a group sharing identifier (eg, MU-PDCCH RNTI) to each user equipment, so that the group of user equipments performing MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel may utilize the MU-PDCCH RNTI
  • a group sharing identifier eg, MU-PDCCH RNTI
  • the received GC-PDCCH is decoded to obtain a DMRS configuration included therein.
  • the descrambling operation on the user equipment side and the scrambling operation on the base station side are relatively simple, but the user equipment needs to perform blind decoding on the UE-specific PDCCH based on multiple interference assumptions. Therefore, the processing load on the user equipment side is large.
  • the receiver of the user equipment cannot demodulate the corresponding information due to the excessive total number of layers of the MU-MIMO transmission, preferably, for the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel,
  • the total number of layers can include two and four layers.
  • the user equipment can learn the interference situation, perform interference cancellation and signal demodulation, and actually implement “non-transparent” MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel, thereby improving system throughput. And reliability.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing a second example aspect according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the DMRS configuration k included in the GC-PDCCH is scrambled by the group-shared identifiers MU-PDCCH RNTI and the user-specific identifier (C-RNTI k) of the UE k, respectively.
  • the first level of scrambling may be performed first by using the MU-PDCCH RNTI to obtain the scrambled first content, and then the second content is scrambled by the C-RNTI k to obtain the second content.
  • the order of scrambling RNTIs used in these two scramblings is not limited.
  • the C-RNTI k can be used for scrambling first, and then the MU-PDCCH RNTI is used for scrambling.
  • the corresponding sequence in the UE k descrambling is to use the MU-MIMO RNTI shared by the group to determine the PDCCH MU-MIMO.
  • the transmission occurs, and the C-RNTI k is used to determine that its own PDCCH participates in the MU-MIMO transmission and its related information.
  • the two-stage scrambling scheme in the foregoing second exemplary solution enables the user equipment to only know its own DMRS configuration and cannot know the interference situation of other UEs in the same group, so this scheme is substantially equivalent to a kind of “transparency”.
  • MU-MIMO transmission
  • FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the user device side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 3000 may include a MU-MIMO transmission control information acquiring unit 3002 and a dedicated transmission control information acquiring unit 3004.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission control information acquiring unit 3002 may be configured to acquire the MU-MIMO transmission of the target user equipment regarding the control channel by decoding the GC-PDCCH from the base station by using the group sharing identifier and the unique identifier of the user equipment. Control information.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission control information acquiring unit 3002 may further include an identifier obtaining module 3021, a first descrambling module 3022, and a second descrambling module 3023.
  • the identifier acquisition module 3021 may be configured to acquire a group common identifier (eg, MU-PDCCH RNTI) and a unique identifier of the user equipment (eg, C-RNTI) from the base station.
  • a group common identifier eg, MU-PDCCH RNTI
  • a unique identifier of the user equipment eg, C-RNTI
  • the first descrambling module 3022 can be configured to decode the received GC-PDCCH to obtain the first content using one of a group-shared identifier and a unique identifier of the user equipment (eg, MU-PDCCH RNTI).
  • the second descrambling module 3023 may be configured to decode the first content acquired by the first descrambling module 3022 by using another one of the group sharing identifier and the unique identifier of the user equipment (eg, C-RNTI) to The control information of the target UE regarding the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel is obtained.
  • the group sharing identifier and the unique identifier of the user equipment eg, C-RNTI
  • the group identifier MU-PDCCH RNTI and the unique identifier C-RNTI k of the UE k are utilized.
  • the GC-PDCCH performs two-stage descrambling, and the DMRS configuration k included in the GC-PDCCH can be uniquely obtained.
  • the first descrambling module 3022 first performs first-level descrambling of the GC-PDCCH with the group-shared identifier MU-PDCCH RNTI in the above example
  • the second descrambling module 3023 utilizes the user-specific identifier.
  • the C-RNTI performs second-level descrambling, but this is not a limitation, and the order of descrambling RNTIs used in the two-stage descrambling can be exchanged.
  • the dedicated transmission control information acquiring unit 3004 may be configured to decode the received UE-specific PDCCH based on the acquired control information of the target UE regarding MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel, thereby acquiring the UE k included therein Transmission control information.
  • the dedicated transmission control information acquiring unit 3004 of the UE k may perform the received UE based on the acquired DMRS configuration k of the UE k. -specific PDCCH decoding.
  • UE k cannot know the DMRS configuration of other UEs in the group, and thus cannot perform interference cancellation, so that the processing performance requirement of the receiver of UE k is low.
  • 31 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 3100 may include a control channel generating unit 3102 and a transmission control unit 3104.
  • the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 3104 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 2404 described above with reference to FIG. 24, and will not be repeated here.
  • the control channel generating unit 3102 may be configured to generate a GC-PDCCH by scrambling control information about MU-MIMO transmission of each UE included in the GC-PDCCH by using the group shared identifier and the unique identifier of the user equipment, respectively. And controlling the base station to send the group sharing identifier and the unique identifier of each user equipment to the user equipment.
  • the control channel generating unit 3102 may further include a first scrambling module 3121, a second scrambling module 3122, and a notification module 3123.
  • the first scrambling module 3121 can be configured to MU for the control channel of each user equipment by using one of the group sharing identifier and one of the dedicated identifiers of the respective user equipment (eg, MU-PDCCH RNTI) for a group of user equipments
  • the control information of the MIMO transmission is scrambled to generate a first content for each user equipment.
  • the first scrambling module 3121 may first configure, for example, the DMRS configuration 1, the DMRS configuration 2, the DMRS configuration k, and the DMRS configuration using the group common identifier MU-PDCCH RNTI.
  • the DMRS configuration m) performs first-level scrambling, respectively, to obtain first content for UE 1, UE 2, UE k, and UE m, respectively.
  • the second scrambling module 3122 can be configured to scramble the first content about the respective user equipment by utilizing another of the group sharing identifier and the unique identifier of each user equipment (eg, C-RNTI), thereby A GC-PDCCH is generated that includes MU-MIMO transmission control information for a control channel of a group of user equipments.
  • the second scrambling module 3122 can perform second-level scrambling on the first content obtained by the first scrambling module 3121 using, for example, a unique identifier of each user equipment. More specifically, the second scrambling module 3122 performs second-level scrambling on the DMRS configuration 1 that has been scrambled with the MU-PDCCH RNTI by using the C-RNTI 1 of the UE 1, using the C-RNTI 2 pair of the UE 2
  • the DMRS configuration 2 scrambled by the MU-PDCCH RNTI performs second-level scrambling, and uses the C-RNTI k of the UE k to perform second-level scrambling on the DMRS configuration k that has been scrambled by using the MU-PDCCH RNTI, and utilizes
  • the C-RNTI m of the UE m performs second-stage scrambling on the DMRS configuration m that has been scrambled with the MU-PDCCH
  • the notification module 3123 can be configured to, for each user equipment, control the base station to send the group common identifier and the unique identifier of the user equipment to the user equipment.
  • the notification module 3123 transmits the group common identifier identifier MU-PDCCH RNTI to the full group of user equipments, but transmits the unique identifier C-RNTI 1 of the UE 1 only to the UE 1 Transmitting the UE 2's unique identifier C-RNTI 2 to the UE 2, transmitting the UE k's unique identifier C-RNTI k only to the UE k, and transmitting the UE m's unique identifier C-RNTI m only to UE m.
  • the user equipment that has mastered the two RNTIs can successfully decode the control information for the user equipment included in the GC-PDCCH, and then use the control information to superimpose the received other UEs.
  • the UE-specific PDCCH of the dedicated transmission control information is decoded to recover the exclusive transmission control information for the user equipment itself.
  • the user equipment can perform information demodulation only according to its own DMRS configuration without interference cancellation, and actually implements "transparent" MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel, thereby simplifying reception.
  • the design and processing of the machine reduces costs.
  • each UE can only recover its own DMRS configuration from the GC-PDCCH and cannot know the interference situation of other UEs in the group.
  • the second embodiment can be combined with the first embodiment such that the second exemplary scheme as "transparent" MU-MIMO transmission can be converted to "non-transparent" MU-MIMO transmission.
  • FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram showing a first example of a modification of the second exemplary embodiment according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the information in the box representing each UE is performed using the group common identifier and the exclusive identifier, respectively.
  • the scrambling is such that each UE can decode from the GC-PDCCH to derive its own DMRS configuration and the total number of layers of MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel.
  • the user equipment may notify the user equipment of the DMRS allocation scheme by using the high layer signaling in advance, or according to the stored default DMRS allocation scheme, the user equipment may configure the DMRS according to the DMRS allocation scheme.
  • the total number of layers of MU-MIMO transmission indirectly introducing the DMRS configuration of other UEs that are scheduled to perform MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel, thereby enabling interference cancellation and information demodulation, thereby realizing the "non-control channel" Transparent "MU-MIMO transmission.
  • the total number of layers, and the DMRS configuration of the user refer to the description of the first embodiment, which is not repeated here.
  • the information about the total number of layers of the MU-MIMO transmission is set in the control information about the MU-MIMO transmission of each UE, and the group-shared identifier and the unique identifier of each UE are utilized, respectively.
  • the symbol is scrambled.
  • the total layer information is the same information. Therefore, preferably, in order to reduce the signaling resources occupied by the total layer information in the GC-PDCCH, the total layer information may also be set as information common to a group of UEs.
  • 32B is a schematic diagram showing a second example of a modification of the second exemplary embodiment according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the total layer number information is represented by a block that is independent of the block representing the DMRS configuration of the four UEs.
  • the total layer number information may be first-level scrambled only by the group-shared identifier MU-PDCCH RNTI, so that only the user equipment configured with the group-shared identifier can decode the total layer number information from the GC-PDCCH.
  • the base station configures, by the RRC signaling, the range of the control resource set (CORESET) that may occur in the GC-PDCCH and the UE-specific PDCCH by using the RRC signaling after the RRC connection is established, and then the user equipment can be configured according to the base station.
  • the CORESET is used to detect and receive the GC-PDCCH and the UE-specific PDCCH from the base station, respectively.
  • FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a relationship between a GC-PDCCH and a UE-specific PDCCH in a time-frequency domain according to a second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the control channel generally appears on the first three OFDM symbols, and the GC-PDCCH generally appears before the UE-specific PDCCH. Since the base station is configured by RRC signaling, which is often a relatively wide time-frequency resource range, as the communication process advances, the base station will become more aware of the network resource allocation and utilization status, and thus may wish to reduce the previously configured CORESET. Scope to improve resource utilization efficiency.
  • FIG. 33 shows that DMRSs are included in an RE group carrying a UE-specific PDCCH, and control information of these DMRSs and UE-specific PDCCHs are respectively placed in different REs in the same physical resource block (PRB). on.
  • PRB physical resource block
  • the indication information about the control resource set that may occur in the UE-specific PDCCH may be carried in the GC-PDCCH to reduce the UE-specific PDCCH that the base station previously configured through RRC.
  • the range of CORESET in this way, can greatly reduce the waste of resources caused by the base station not being able to predict in advance the exact scheduling information when the RRC configures the CORESET resource. That is, by dynamically adjusting the search space of the user equipment for the UE-specific PDCCH by using the GC-PDCCH, the computational complexity and power consumption of the UE can be reduced, and the detection delay of the PDCCH is reduced, and system performance and resource utilization are optimized. effectiveness.
  • FIG. 34 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of the device on the user device side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 3400 may include a MU-MIMO transmission control information acquisition unit 3402, an instruction information acquisition unit 3404, a detection unit 3406, and a dedicated transmission control information acquisition unit 3408.
  • the indication information acquisition unit 3404 may be configured to acquire indication information of a control resource set to which the transmission resource for transmitting the UE-specific PDCCH belongs by decoding the GC-PDCCH.
  • the GC-PDCCH from the base station further includes indication information of a CORESET that may be generated by the UE-specific PDCCH.
  • the indication information may preferably include an indication of OFDM symbols occupied by the CORESET that may occur of the UE-specific PDCCH, ie, an indication of which of the first three OFDM symbols the UE-specific PDCCH may appear on.
  • the detecting unit 3406 may be configured to perform detection on the corresponding control resource set according to the acquired indication information to receive the UE-specific PDCCH of the user equipment.
  • the present disclosure also provides a configuration example of the following base station side.
  • 35 is a block diagram showing another functional configuration example of a device on the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the apparatus 3500 may include a control channel generating unit 3502 and a transmission control unit 3504.
  • the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 3504 is substantially the same as the functional configuration example of the transmission control unit 2404 described above with reference to FIG. 24, and will not be repeated here.
  • the control channel generating unit 3502 is configured to include, in the GC-PDCCH, information indicating a control resource set to which the transmission resource of the UE-specific PDCCH of each user equipment belongs, to be used by each user equipment to decode the respective UE by decoding the GC-PDCCH. -specific PDCCH line reception detection.
  • the GC-PDCCH from the base station may include, in addition to the control information of the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel of the group of user equipments, the CORESET that may occur with respect to the UE-specific PDCCH of each user equipment. Instructions. This is because the base station can make more precise resource scheduling at this time than the time when the CORESET that may occur by configuring the GC-PDCCH and the UE-specific PDCCH through RRC, so that the range of CORESET that may occur in the UE-specific PDCCH can be narrowed.
  • the related indication information is included in the GC-PDCCH that appears before the UE-specific PDCCH, so that the user equipment can perform the UE-specific PDCCH detection on the narrowed CORESET range according to the indication information included in the GC-PDCCH. receive.
  • the indication information may include an indication of an OFDM symbol occupied by a CORESET to which the transmission resource for transmitting the UE-specific PDCCH belongs, that is, an indication of which OFDM symbols the UE-specific PDCCH may appear on.
  • the search space of the UE-specific PDCCH by the user equipment can be narrowed, for example, from The three OFDM symbols are reduced to two OFDM symbols or even one OFDM symbol, thereby greatly reducing the processing load and power consumption of the user equipment and reducing the detection delay of the UE-specific PDCCH.
  • the base station can perform more precise resource scheduling, the resource utilization efficiency is also greatly improved.
  • the present disclosure also provides the following method embodiments.
  • 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a method on the user equipment side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • step S3601 the transmission related configuration of the other user equipment is determined according to the control information from the base station that the user equipment and the other user equipment are simultaneously scheduled to perform MU-MIMO transmission, where the control information includes indirectly indicating other user equipments. Transfer information about the configuration.
  • the transmission related configuration may comprise a DMRS configuration.
  • the target UE indirectly derives the DMRS configuration of the other user equipment according to the information of the DMRS configuration indirectly indicating the other user equipment included in the control information, refer to the first to fourth exemplary solutions in the first embodiment above. The description of the device on the user equipment side will not be repeated here.
  • step S3602 based on the determined transmission related configuration of the other user equipment, the signal transmitted from the base station and transmitted using the MU-MIMO transmission is decoded to acquire a signal portion for the user equipment.
  • the signal part of the other user equipment may be eliminated as interference from the received superposed data stream according to the acquired DMRS configuration of the other user equipment, and the signal for the target UE may be recovered. section.
  • the specific process refer to the description of the corresponding position in the above device embodiment, which is not repeated here.
  • FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a method at the base station side according to the first embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • step S3701 control information about MU-MIMO transmission is generated for each user equipment in one or more user equipments within a group of user equipments that are simultaneously scheduled for MU-MIMO transmission, and the control base station controls the information. Sent to the user device.
  • the control information includes information that indirectly indicates a transmission related configuration of other user equipments other than the user equipment within a group of user equipment.
  • the “one or more user devices” may be all user devices in a group of user devices, or may be partial user devices.
  • the base station may indirectly indicate to some of the user equipments therein transmission-related configurations of other user equipments, supporting a hybrid configuration of "transparent" and "opaque” MU-MIMO transmissions of the data channel.
  • control information including information indicating a transmission-related configuration of other user equipments indirectly can be referred to the description of the apparatus on the base station side in the first to fourth example schemes of the first embodiment above. , no longer repeat here.
  • step S3702 the control base station simultaneously transmits a signal to a group of user equipments on a specific transmission resource.
  • 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a method on the user equipment side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • step S3801 a group shared physical downlink control channel (GC-PDCCH) of a group of user equipments including the target user equipment is decoded to acquire control information about MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel.
  • the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel herein refers to superimposing UE-specific PDCCHs of multiple user equipments on the same time-frequency resource for transmission.
  • step S3802 based on the acquired control information about the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel, the UE-specific PDCCH of the target UE that is transmitted on the same time-frequency resource as the UE-specific PDCCH of the other UE is superimposed Decoding to obtain the dedicated transmission control information of the target UE.
  • the indication information of the CORESET to which the transmission resource of the UE-specific PDCCH is transmitted by the base station is obtained by decoding the GC-PDCCH, and then detecting the corresponding time-frequency resource according to the indication information to receive the UE- Specific PDCCH.
  • 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a method at the base station side according to the second embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • step S3901 a GC-PDCCH of a group of user equipments and a UE-specific PDCCH of each user equipment are generated.
  • the GC-PDCCH includes control information for MU-MIMO transmission of a control channel of a group of user equipments.
  • control information of the MU-MIMO transmission included in the GC-PDCCH reference may be made to the description of the apparatus on the base station side in the first to third exemplary schemes of the second embodiment above, which will not be repeated here.
  • the GC-PDCCH further includes information indicating a CORESET that may be generated by the UE-specific PDCCH of each UE, to narrow the search space of the UE-specific PDCCH by the user equipment.
  • step S3902 the control base station transmits the generated GC-PDCCH to a group of user equipments, and based on the control information about the MU-MIMO transmission of the control channel, the control base station transmits the same in the set of user equipments on the same transmission resource.
  • UE-specific PDCCH of each user equipment UE-specific PDCCH of each user equipment.
  • an electronic device which can include a transceiver and one or more processors, the one or more processors can be configured to perform the implementations described above in accordance with the present disclosure
  • the function of the corresponding unit in the method or device in the wireless communication system, and the transceiver can assume the corresponding communication function.
  • machine-executable instructions in the storage medium and the program product according to the embodiments of the present disclosure may also be configured to perform the method corresponding to the apparatus embodiment described above, and thus the content not described in detail herein may refer to the previous corresponding The description of the location will not be repeated here.
  • a storage medium for carrying the above-described program product including machine-executable instructions is also included in the disclosure of the present invention.
  • the storage medium includes, but is not limited to, a floppy disk, an optical disk, a magneto-optical disk, a memory card, a memory stick, and the like.
  • the series of processes and devices described above can also be implemented in software and/or firmware.
  • a program constituting the software is installed from a storage medium or a network to a computer having a dedicated hardware structure, such as the general-purpose personal computer 4000 shown in FIG. 40, which is installed with various programs.
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing an example structure of a personal computer which is an information processing device which can be employed in the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • a central processing unit (CPU) 4001 executes various processes in accordance with a program stored in a read only memory (ROM) 4002 or a program loaded from a storage portion 4008 to a random access memory (RAM) 4003.
  • ROM read only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • data required when the CPU 4001 executes various processes and the like is also stored as needed.
  • the CPU 4001, the ROM 4002, and the RAM 4003 are connected to each other via a bus 4004.
  • Input/output interface 4005 is also coupled to bus 4004.
  • the following components are connected to the input/output interface 4005: an input portion 4006 including a keyboard, a mouse, etc.; an output portion 4007 including a display such as a cathode ray tube (CRT), a liquid crystal display (LCD), etc., and a speaker, etc.; a storage portion 4008 , including a hard disk or the like; and a communication portion 4009 including a network interface card such as a LAN card, a modem, and the like.
  • the communication section 4009 performs communication processing via a network such as the Internet.
  • the driver 4010 is also connected to the input/output interface 4005 as needed.
  • a removable medium 4011 such as a magnetic disk, an optical disk, a magneto-optical disk, a semiconductor memory or the like is mounted on the drive 4010 as needed, so that a computer program read therefrom is installed into the storage portion 4008 as needed.
  • a program constituting the software is installed from a network such as the Internet or a storage medium such as the detachable medium 4011.
  • such a storage medium is not limited to the removable medium 4011 shown in FIG. 40 in which a program is stored and distributed separately from the device to provide a program to the user.
  • the detachable medium 4011 include a magnetic disk (including a floppy disk (registered trademark)), an optical disk (including a compact disk read only memory (CD-ROM) and a digital versatile disk (DVD)), and a magneto-optical disk (including a mini disk (MD) (registered trademark) )) and semiconductor memory.
  • the storage medium may be a ROM 4002, a hard disk included in the storage portion 4008, or the like, in which programs are stored, and distributed to the user together with the device including them.
  • the base stations mentioned in the present disclosure may be implemented as a gNodeB (gNB), any type of eNB (such as a macro eNB and a small eNB), a Transmission Receive Point (TRP), an Enterprise Long Term Evolution (eLTE)-eNB, and the like.
  • the small eNB may be an eNB covering a cell smaller than the macro cell, such as a pico eNB, a micro eNB, and a home (femto) eNB.
  • the base station can be implemented as any other type of base station, such as a NodeB and a Base Transceiver Station (BTS).
  • BTS Base Transceiver Station
  • the base station may include: a body (also referred to as a base station device) configured to control wireless communication; and one or more remote radio heads (RRHs) disposed at a different location from the body.
  • a body also referred to as a base station device
  • RRHs remote radio heads
  • various types of terminals which will be described below, can operate as a base station by performing base station functions temporarily or semi-persistently.
  • the user equipment mentioned in the present disclosure may be implemented as a vehicle, a mobile terminal such as a smart phone, a tablet personal computer (PC), a notebook PC, a portable game terminal, a portable/encrypted dog type mobile router, and a digital camera. , vehicle terminals (such as car navigation equipment), drones, mobile stations, and so on.
  • vehicle terminals such as car navigation equipment
  • drones such as car navigation equipment
  • the user equipment may also be implemented as a terminal (also referred to as a machine type communication (MTC) terminal) that performs machine to machine (M2M) communication.
  • MTC machine type communication
  • M2M machine to machine
  • the user equipment may be a wireless communication module (such as an integrated circuit module including a single wafer) installed on each of the above terminals.
  • the eNB 1400 includes one or more antennas 1410 and base station devices 1420.
  • the base station device 1420 and each antenna 1410 can be connected to each other via an RF cable.
  • Each of the antennas 1410 includes a single or multiple antenna elements, such as multiple antenna elements included in a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) antenna, and is used by the base station device 1420 to transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • the eNB 1400 can include multiple antennas 1410.
  • multiple antennas 1410 can be compatible with multiple frequency bands used by eNB 1400.
  • FIG. 41 illustrates an example in which the eNB 1400 includes multiple antennas 1410, the eNB 1400 may also include a single antenna 1410.
  • the base station device 1420 includes a controller 1421, a memory 1422, a network interface 1423, and a wireless communication interface 1425.
  • the controller 1421 may be, for example, a CPU or a DSP, and operates various functions of higher layers of the base station device 1420. For example, controller 1421 generates data packets based on data in signals processed by wireless communication interface 1425 and communicates the generated packets via network interface 1423. The controller 1421 can bundle data from a plurality of baseband processors to generate bundled packets and deliver the generated bundled packets. The controller 1421 may have a logical function that performs control such as radio resource control, radio bearer control, mobility management, admission control, and scheduling. This control can be performed in conjunction with nearby eNBs or core network nodes.
  • the memory 1422 includes a RAM and a ROM, and stores programs executed by the controller 1421 and various types of control data such as a terminal list, transmission power data, and scheduling data.
  • Network interface 1423 is a communication interface for connecting base station device 1420 to core network 1424. Controller 1421 can communicate with a core network node or another eNB via network interface 1423. In this case, the eNB 1400 and the core network node or other eNBs may be connected to each other through a logical interface such as an S1 interface and an X2 interface.
  • the network interface 1423 can also be a wired communication interface or a wireless communication interface for wireless backhaul lines. If network interface 1423 is a wireless communication interface, network interface 1423 can use a higher frequency band for wireless communication than the frequency band used by wireless communication interface 1425.
  • the wireless communication interface 1425 supports any cellular communication scheme, such as Long Term Evolution (LTE), LTE-Advanced (LTE-A), and New Radio Access Technology (NR), and is provided via antenna 1410 to a cell located in the eNB 1400.
  • Wireless communication interface 1425 may typically include, for example, baseband (BB) processor 1426 and RF circuitry 1427.
  • the BB processor 1426 can perform, for example, encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, and multiplexing/demultiplexing, and performs layers (eg, L1, Medium Access Control (MAC), Radio Link Control (RLC), and Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP))
  • layers eg, L1, Medium Access Control (MAC), Radio Link Control (RLC), and Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)
  • MAC Medium Access Control
  • RLC Radio Link Control
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • BB processor 1426 may have some or all of the logic functions described above.
  • the BB processor 1426 may be a memory that stores a communication control program or a module that includes a processor and associated circuitry configured to execute the program.
  • the update program can cause the function of the BB processor 1426 to change.
  • the module can be a card or blade that is inserted into a slot of base station device 1420. Alternatively, the module can also be a chip mounted on a card or blade.
  • the RF circuit 1427 may include, for example, a mixer, a filter, and an amplifier, and transmits and receives a wireless signal via the antenna 1410.
  • the wireless communication interface 1425 can include a plurality of BB processors 1426.
  • multiple BB processors 1426 can be compatible with multiple frequency bands used by eNB 1400.
  • the wireless communication interface 1425 can include a plurality of RF circuits 1427.
  • multiple RF circuits 1427 can be compatible with multiple antenna elements.
  • FIG. 41 illustrates an example in which the wireless communication interface 1425 includes a plurality of BB processors 1426 and a plurality of RF circuits 1427, the wireless communication interface 1425 may also include a single BB processor 1426 or a single RF circuit 1427.
  • the eNB 1530 includes one or more antennas 1540, base station equipment 1550, and RRH 1560.
  • the RRH 1560 and each antenna 1540 may be connected to each other via an RF cable.
  • the base station device 1550 and the RRH 1560 can be connected to each other via a high speed line such as a fiber optic cable.
  • Each of the antennas 1540 includes a single or multiple antenna elements (such as multiple antenna elements included in a MIMO antenna) and is used by the RRH 1560 to transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • the eNB 1530 can include multiple antennas 1540.
  • multiple antennas 1540 can be compatible with multiple frequency bands used by eNB 1530.
  • FIG. 42 illustrates an example in which the eNB 1530 includes multiple antennas 1540, the eNB 1530 may also include a single antenna 1540.
  • the base station device 1550 includes a controller 1551, a memory 1552, a network interface 1553, a wireless communication interface 1555, and a connection interface 1557.
  • the controller 1551, the memory 1552, and the network interface 1553 are the same as the controller 1421, the memory 1422, and the network interface 1423 described with reference to FIG.
  • the wireless communication interface 1555 supports any cellular communication scheme (such as LTE, LTE-Advanced, and NR) and provides wireless communication to terminals located in sectors corresponding to the RRH 1560 via the RRH 1560 and the antenna 1540.
  • Wireless communication interface 1555 can typically include, for example, BB processor 1556.
  • the BB processor 1556 is identical to the BB processor 1426 described with reference to FIG. 41 except that the BB processor 1556 is connected to the RF circuit 1564 of the RRH 1560 via the connection interface 1557.
  • wireless communication interface 1555 can include a plurality of BB processors 1556.
  • multiple BB processors 1556 can be compatible with multiple frequency bands used by eNB 1530.
  • FIG. 42 illustrates an example in which the wireless communication interface 1555 includes a plurality of BB processors 1556, the wireless communication interface 1555 can also include a single BB processor 1556.
  • connection interface 1557 is an interface for connecting the base station device 1550 (wireless communication interface 1555) to the RRH 1560.
  • the connection interface 1557 may also be a communication module for communicating the base station device 1550 (wireless communication interface 1555) to the above-described high speed line of the RRH 1560.
  • the RRH 1560 includes a connection interface 1561 and a wireless communication interface 1563.
  • connection interface 1561 is an interface for connecting the RRH 1560 (wireless communication interface 1563) to the base station device 1550.
  • the connection interface 1561 can also be a communication module for communication in the above high speed line.
  • the wireless communication interface 1563 transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 1540.
  • Wireless communication interface 1563 can generally include, for example, RF circuitry 1564.
  • the RF circuit 1564 can include, for example, a mixer, a filter, and an amplifier, and transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 1540.
  • wireless communication interface 1563 can include a plurality of RF circuits 1564.
  • multiple RF circuits 1564 can support multiple antenna elements.
  • FIG. 42 illustrates an example in which the wireless communication interface 1563 includes a plurality of RF circuits 1564, the wireless communication interface 1563 may also include a single RF circuit 1564.
  • the transceiver in the above-described base station side device can be implemented by the wireless communication interface 1425 and the wireless communication interface 1555 and/or the wireless communication interface 1563. At least a part of the functions of the apparatus on the base station side described above may also be implemented by the controller 1421 and the controller 1551.
  • FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a smartphone 1600 to which the technology of the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the smart phone 1600 includes a processor 1601, a memory 1602, a storage device 1603, an external connection interface 1604, an imaging device 1606, a sensor 1607, a microphone 1608, an input device 1609, a display device 1610, a speaker 1611, a wireless communication interface 1612, and one or more An antenna switch 1615, one or more antennas 1616, a bus 1617, a battery 1618, and an auxiliary controller 1619.
  • the processor 1601 may be, for example, a CPU or a system on chip (SoC), and controls the functions of the application layer and the other layers of the smartphone 1600.
  • the memory 1602 includes a RAM and a ROM, and stores data and programs executed by the processor 1601.
  • the storage device 1603 may include a storage medium such as a semiconductor memory and a hard disk.
  • the external connection interface 1604 is an interface for connecting an external device such as a memory card and a universal serial bus (USB) device to the smartphone 1600.
  • the imaging device 1606 includes an image sensor such as a charge coupled device (CCD) and a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), and generates a captured image.
  • Sensor 1607 can include a set of sensors, such as a measurement sensor, a gyro sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, and an acceleration sensor.
  • the microphone 1608 converts the sound input to the smartphone 1600 into an audio signal.
  • the input device 1609 includes, for example, a touch sensor, a keypad, a keyboard, a button, or a switch configured to detect a touch on the screen of the display device 1610, and receives an operation or information input from a user.
  • the display device 1610 includes screens such as a liquid crystal display (LCD) and an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, and displays an output image of the smartphone 1600.
  • the speaker 1611 converts the audio signal output from the smartphone 1600 into sound.
  • the wireless communication interface 1612 supports any cellular communication scheme (such as LTE, LTE-Advanced and New Radio Access Technology NR) and performs wireless communication.
  • Wireless communication interface 1612 may typically include, for example, BB processor 1613 and RF circuitry 1614.
  • the BB processor 1613 can perform, for example, encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, and multiplexing/demultiplexing, and performs various types of signal processing for wireless communication.
  • RF circuitry 1614 may include, for example, mixers, filters, and amplifiers, and transmit and receive wireless signals via antenna 1616.
  • the wireless communication interface 1612 can be a chip module on which the BB processor 1613 and the RF circuit 1614 are integrated. As shown in FIG.
  • the wireless communication interface 1612 can include a plurality of BB processors 1613 and a plurality of RF circuits 1614.
  • FIG. 43 illustrates an example in which the wireless communication interface 1612 includes a plurality of BB processors 1613 and a plurality of RF circuits 1614, the wireless communication interface 1612 may also include a single BB processor 1613 or a single RF circuit 1614.
  • wireless communication interface 1612 can support additional types of wireless communication schemes, such as short-range wireless communication schemes, near field communication schemes, and wireless local area network (LAN) schemes.
  • the wireless communication interface 1612 can include a BB processor 1613 and RF circuitry 1614 for each wireless communication scheme.
  • Each of the antenna switches 1615 switches the connection destination of the antenna 1616 between a plurality of circuits included in the wireless communication interface 1612, such as circuits for different wireless communication schemes.
  • Each of the antennas 1616 includes a single or multiple antenna elements (such as multiple antenna elements included in a MIMO antenna) and is used by the wireless communication interface 1612 to transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • smart phone 1600 can include multiple antennas 1616.
  • FIG. 43 illustrates an example in which smart phone 1600 includes multiple antennas 1616, smart phone 1600 may also include a single antenna 1616.
  • smart phone 1600 can include an antenna 1616 for each wireless communication scheme.
  • the antenna switch 1615 can be omitted from the configuration of the smartphone 1600.
  • the bus 1617 has a processor 1601, a memory 1602, a storage device 1603, an external connection interface 1604, an imaging device 1606, a sensor 1607, a microphone 1608, an input device 1609, a display device 1610, a speaker 1611, a wireless communication interface 1612, and an auxiliary controller 1619. connection.
  • Battery 1618 provides power to various blocks of smart phone 1600 shown in FIG. 43 via a feeder, which is partially shown as a dashed line in the figure.
  • the secondary controller 1619 operates the minimum required function of the smartphone 1600, for example, in a sleep mode.
  • the transceiver in the device on the user equipment side described above can be implemented by the wireless communication interface 1612. At least a part of the functions of the device on the user equipment side described above may also be implemented by the processor 1601 or the auxiliary controller 1619.
  • FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing an example of a schematic configuration of a car navigation device 1720 to which the technology of the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the car navigation device 1720 includes a processor 1721, a memory 1722, a global positioning system (GPS) module 1724, a sensor 1725, a data interface 1726, a content player 1727, a storage medium interface 1728, an input device 1729, a display device 1730, a speaker 1731, and a wireless device.
  • the processor 1721 can be, for example, a CPU or SoC and controls the navigation functions and additional functions of the car navigation device 1720.
  • the memory 1722 includes a RAM and a ROM, and stores data and programs executed by the processor 1721.
  • the GPS module 1724 measures the position (such as latitude, longitude, and altitude) of the car navigation device 1720 using GPS signals received from GPS satellites.
  • Sensor 1725 can include a set of sensors, such as a gyro sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, and an air pressure sensor.
  • the data interface 1726 is connected to, for example, the in-vehicle network 1741 via a terminal not shown, and acquires data (such as vehicle speed data) generated by the vehicle.
  • the content player 1727 reproduces content stored in a storage medium such as a CD and a DVD, which is inserted into the storage medium interface 1728.
  • the input device 1729 includes, for example, a touch sensor, a button or a switch configured to detect a touch on the screen of the display device 1730, and receives an operation or information input from a user.
  • the display device 1730 includes a screen such as an LCD or OLED display, and displays an image of the navigation function or reproduced content.
  • the speaker 1731 outputs the sound of the navigation function or the reproduced content.
  • the wireless communication interface 1733 supports any cellular communication scheme (such as LTE, LTE-Advanced and New Radio Access Technology NR) and performs wireless communication.
  • Wireless communication interface 1733 can generally include, for example, BB processor 1734 and RF circuitry 1735.
  • the BB processor 1734 can perform, for example, encoding/decoding, modulation/demodulation, and multiplexing/demultiplexing, and performs various types of signal processing for wireless communication.
  • the RF circuit 1735 can include, for example, a mixer, a filter, and an amplifier, and transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 1737.
  • the wireless communication interface 1733 can also be a chip module on which the BB processor 1734 and the RF circuit 1735 are integrated. As shown in FIG.
  • the wireless communication interface 1733 can include a plurality of BB processors 1734 and a plurality of RF circuits 1735.
  • FIG. 44 illustrates an example in which the wireless communication interface 1733 includes a plurality of BB processors 1734 and a plurality of RF circuits 1735, the wireless communication interface 1733 may also include a single BB processor 1734 or a single RF circuit 1735.
  • wireless communication interface 1733 can support additional types of wireless communication schemes, such as short-range wireless communication schemes, near field communication schemes, and wireless LAN schemes.
  • the wireless communication interface 1733 can include a BB processor 1734 and an RF circuit 1735 for each wireless communication scheme.
  • Each of the antenna switches 1736 switches the connection destination of the antenna 1737 between a plurality of circuits included in the wireless communication interface 1733, such as circuits for different wireless communication schemes.
  • Each of the antennas 1737 includes a single or multiple antenna elements (such as multiple antenna elements included in a MIMO antenna) and is used by the wireless communication interface 1733 to transmit and receive wireless signals.
  • car navigation device 1720 can include a plurality of antennas 1737.
  • FIG. 44 shows an example in which the car navigation device 1720 includes a plurality of antennas 1737, the car navigation device 1720 may also include a single antenna 1737.
  • car navigation device 1720 can include an antenna 1737 for each wireless communication scheme.
  • the antenna switch 1736 can be omitted from the configuration of the car navigation device 1720.
  • Battery 1738 provides power to various blocks of car navigation device 1720 shown in FIG. 44 via a feeder, which is partially shown as a dashed line in the figure. Battery 1738 accumulates power supplied from the vehicle.
  • the transceiver in the device on the user device side described above can be implemented by the communication interface 1733. At least a portion of the functions of the device on the user equipment side described above may also be implemented by the processor 1721.
  • the technology of the present disclosure may also be implemented as an in-vehicle system (or vehicle) 1740 including one or more of the car navigation device 1720, the in-vehicle network 1741, and the vehicle module 1742.
  • vehicle module 1742 generates vehicle data such as vehicle speed, engine speed, and fault information, and outputs the generated data to the in-vehicle network 1741.
  • a plurality of functions included in one unit in the above embodiment may be implemented by separate devices.
  • a plurality of functions implemented by a plurality of units in the above embodiments may be implemented by separate devices, respectively.
  • one of the above functions may be implemented by a plurality of units. Needless to say, such a configuration is included in the technical scope of the present disclosure.
  • the steps described in the flowcharts include not only processes performed in time series in the stated order, but also processes performed in parallel or individually rather than necessarily in time series. Further, even in the step of processing in time series, it is needless to say that the order can be appropriately changed.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Quality & Reliability (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
  • Radio Transmission System (AREA)

Abstract

本公开提供了一种无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质。该装置包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置成：对包括目标用户设备的一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道(group common PDCCH)进行解码，以获取关于控制信道的多用户-多输入多输出(MU-MIMO)传输的控制信息；以及基于该控制信息，对目标用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道(UE-specific PDCCH)进行解码，以获取关于目标用户设备的专属传输控制信息，其中，目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH与其他用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在相同的传输资源上进行传输。根据本公开的实施例的至少一方面，有效地实现了对于下行控制信道的MU-MIMO传输，从而提高了资源利用率。

Description

无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质
本申请要求于2018年2月11日提交中国专利局、申请号为201810140997.9、发明名称为“无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及无线通信技术领域，更具体地，涉及一种用于优化多用户-多输入多输出(Multi-User Multiple Input Multiple Output,MU-MIMO)传输的无线通信系统中的装置和方法、非暂态计算机可读存储介质。
背景技术
新无线电(New Radio，NR)作为针对长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)的下一代的无线接入方式，是与LTE不同的无线接入技术(Radio Access Technology，RAT)。NR是能够应对包括增强移动宽带(Enhanced mobile broadband，eMBB)、大规模机器类型通信(Massive machine type communications，mMTC)以及超可靠和低延迟通信(Ultra reliable and low latency communications，URLLC)的各种用例(use case)的接入技术。以与这些用例中的利用场景、请求条件以及配置场景等对应的技术架构为目标研究了NR。NR的场景、请求条件的详细内容在非专利文献1中被公开。
一方面，在目前的长期演进(LTE，或称为4G)/新无线接入技术(NR，或称为5G)无线通信系统中，已经支持下行数据信道(即，物理下行共享信道，PDSCH)的“透明”MU-MIMO传输。这里所谓的“透明”MU-MIMO传输是指目标用户设备(User Equipment,UE)并不知道与其一同被调度进行MU-MIMO传输的其他用户设备的存在，即，目标UE并不知道其他用户设备的数据流所在的层对目标数据流所在层的确切干扰，从而目标UE的接收机仅尝试解码出目标数据流，无法对层间干扰进行有效的处理。
“透明”MU-MIMO传输下的用户设备由于不知道多用户间的干扰情况，从而无法实现多用户之间的干扰测量，进而无法抑制或消除多用户之间的干扰，在一定程度上降低了系统的吞吐量和可靠性。
另一方面，在目前的4G/5G通信系统中，尚未提出关于下行控制信道(物 理下行控制信道，PDCCH)的MU-MIMO传输。具体来说，在现有技术中，在某一传输资源上仅传输针对某一特定用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道(UE-specific PDCCH)，不同用户设备的控制信道之间并不能利用多天线的空域处理能力来共享传输资源。也就是说，现有技术中并不会将不同用户设备的UE-specific PDDCH叠加在同一传输资源上进行传输，这降低了时频资源的利用率。
现有技术文献
非专利文献
非专利文献1：3rd Generation Partnership Project；Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network；Study on Scenarios and Requirements for Next Generation Access Technologies；(Release 14),3GPP TR 38.913 V0.2.0(2016-02)。
发明内容
在下文中给出了关于本公开的简要概述，以便提供关于本公开的某些方面的基本理解。但是，应当理解，这个概述并不是关于本公开的穷举性概述。它并不是意图用来确定本公开的关键性部分或重要部分，也不是意图用来限定本公开的范围。其目的仅仅是以简化的形式给出关于本公开的某些概念，以此作为稍后给出的更详细描述的前序。
鉴于上述问题，本公开的至少一方面的目的是提供一种无线通信系统中的装置和方法、非暂态计算机可读存储介质，其能够有效地实现下行控制信道的MU-MIMO传输。
本公开的另一方面的目的是提供一种无线通信系统中的装置和方法、非暂态计算机可读存储介质，其使得目标用户设备能够间接地获知来自与其一同被调度进行下行数据信道的MU-MIMO传输的其他用户设备的干扰情况，从而提高了系统的吞吐量和可靠性。
根据本公开的一方面，提供了一种无线通信系统中的装置，该装置包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置成：对包括目标用户设备的一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道(group common PDCCH)进行解码，以获取关于控制信道 的多用户-多输入多输出(MU-MIMO)传输的控制信息；以及基于该控制信息，对目标用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道(UE-specific PDCCH)进行解码，以获取关于目标用户设备的专属传输控制信息，其中，目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH与一组用户设备中的其他用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在相同的传输资源上进行传输。
根据本公开的另一方面，还提供了一种无线通信系统中的装置，该装置包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置成：生成一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道(group common PDCCH)以及一组用户设备中的各个用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道(UE-specific PDCCH)，该组共用物理下行控制信道包括一组用户设备中的所有用户设备的关于控制信道的多用户-多输入多输出(MU-MIMO)传输的控制信息；控制基站将组共用物理下行控制信道发送至一组用户设备；以及基于控制信息，控制基站在相同的传输资源上发送一组用户设备中的各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH。
根据本公开的又一方面，还提供了一种无线通信系统中的方法，该方法包括：对包括目标用户设备的一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道(group common PDCCH)进行解码，以获取关于控制信道的多用户-多输入多输出(MU-MIMO)传输的控制信息；以及基于该控制信息，对目标用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道(UE-specific PDCCH)进行解码，以获取关于目标用户设备的专属传输控制信息，其中，目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH与一组用户设备中的其他用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在相同的传输资源上进行传输。
根据本公开的再一方面，还提供了一种无线通信系统中的方法，该方法包括：生成一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道(Group common PDCCH)以及一组用户设备中的各个用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道(UE-specific PDCCH)，该组共用物理下行控制信道包括一组用户设备中的所有用户设备的关于控制信道的多用户-多输入多输出(MU-MIMO)传输的控制信息；控制基站将组共用物理下行控制信道发送至一组用户设备；以及基于控制信息，控制基站在相同的传输资源上发送一组用户设备中的各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH。
根据本公开的一方面，提供了一种无线通信系统中的装置，该装置包括处 理电路，该处理电路被配置成：根据来自基站的关于用户设备与其他用户设备同时被调度进行多用户-多输入多输出(MU-MIMO)传输的控制信息，确定其他用户设备的传输相关配置，其中，该控制信息包括间接地指示其他用户设备的传输相关配置的信息；以及基于所确定的其他用户设备的传输相关配置，对从基站接收到的利用MU-MIMO传输发送的信号进行解码，以获取针对该用户设备的信号部分。
根据本公开的另一方面，还提供了一种无线通信系统中的装置，该装置包括处理电路，该处理电路被配置成：针对被同时调度进行多用户-多输入多输出(MU-MIMO)传输的一组用户设备内的一个或多个用户设备中的每个用户设备，生成关于MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，并且控制基站将控制信息发送至该用户设备，其中，该控制信息包括间接地指示一组用户设备内除该用户设备之外的其他用户设备的传输相关配置的信息；以及控制基站在特定传输资源上同时向一组用户设备发送信号。
根据本公开的又一方面，还提供了一种无线通信系统中的方法，该方法包括：根据来自基站的关于用户设备与其他用户设备同时被调度进行多用户-多输入多输出(MU-MIMO)传输的控制信息，确定其他用户设备的传输相关配置，其中，该控制信息包括间接地指示其他用户设备的传输相关配置的信息；以及基于所确定的其他用户设备的传输相关配置，对从基站接收到的利用MU-MIMO传输发送的信号进行解码，以获取针对该用户设备的信号部分。
根据本公开的再一方面，还提供了一种无线通信系统中的方法，该方法包括：针对被同时调度进行多用户-多输入多输出(MU-MIMO)传输的一组用户设备内的一个或多个用户设备中的每个用户设备，生成关于MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，并且控制基站将控制信息发送至该用户设备，其中，该控制信息包括间接地指示一组用户设备内除该用户设备之外的其他用户设备的传输相关配置的信息；以及控制基站在特定传输资源上同时向一组用户设备发送信号。
根据本公开的另一方面，还提供了一种存储有可执行指令的非暂态计算机可读存储介质，该可执行指令当由处理器执行时，使得处理器执行上述无线通信系统中的方法或装置的各个功能。
根据本公开的其它方面，还提供了用于实现上述根据本公开的方法的计算 机程序代码和计算机程序产品。
根据本公开的实施例的至少一方面，通过将关于一组用户设备的控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息承载于组共用物理下行控制信道中，使得各个用户设备能够通过对组共用物理下行控制信道进行解码而获知至少自身的UE-specific PDCCH的传输相关配置(例如，DMRS配置)，进而根据该传输相关配置从接收到的叠加信号中提取自身的UE-specific PDCCH，有效地实现了下行控制信道的MU-MIMO传输，从而提高了资源利用率。
根据本公开的实施例的至少另一方面，针对下行数据信道的MU-MIMO传输，通过间接地向目标UE指示与其一同被调度的其他用户设备的传输相关配置，能够有效利用有限的物理层调度信令而使得目标UE能够根据该传输相关配置确定、抑制和/或消除来自其他用户设备的干扰，进而解码得到针对目标UE的目标数据流，提高了系统吞吐量和可靠性。
在下面的说明书部分中给出本公开实施例的其它方面，其中，详细说明用于充分地公开本公开实施例的优选实施例，而不对其施加限定。
附图说明
本公开可以通过参考下文中结合附图所给出的详细描述而得到更好的理解，其中在所有附图中使用了相同或相似的附图标记来表示相同或者相似的部件。所述附图连同下面的详细说明一起包含在本说明书中并形成说明书的一部分，用来进一步举例说明本公开的优选实施例和解释本公开的原理和优点。其中：
图1是示出“透明”MU-MIMO传输的示例的示意图；
图2是示出“非透明”MU-MIMO传输的示例的示意图；
图3是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的功能配置示例的框图；
图4是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置的功能配置示例的框图；
图5是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图
图6是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示 例的框图；
图7是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用于实现第一示例方案的信令交互过程的流程图；
图8是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的CSI-RS资源或者CSI-RS端口与DMRS端口之间的映射关系的示例的示意图；
图9是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图10是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置中的确定单元的具体功能配置示例的框图；
图11是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置中的干扰测量单元的具体功能配置示例的框图；
图12是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图13是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置中的控制信息生成单元的具体功能配置示例的框图；
图14是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用于实现第二示例方案的信令交互过程的流程图；
图15是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图16是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图17是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用于实现第三示例方案的信令交互过程的流程图；
图18是示出DMRS端口7至10在资源元素(RE)上的映射图案的示例的示意图；
图19是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图20是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图21是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用于实现第四示例方案的信令交 互过程的流程图；
图22是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用于实现控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的两级DCI结构的信令交互过程的流程图；
图23是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的装置的功能配置示例的框图；
图24是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧的装置的功能配置示例的框图；
图25是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的GC-PDCCH的示例架构以及GC-PDCCH与UE-specific PDDCH之间的关系的示意图；
图26是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的第一示例方案的示意图；
图27是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图28是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图29是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的第二示例方案的示意图；
图30是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图31是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图32A是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的第二示例方案的变型例的第一示例的示意图；
图32B是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的第二示例方案的变型例的第二示例的示意图；
图33是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的GC-PDCCH和UE-specific PDCCH在时频域上的关系的示意图；
图34是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图35是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图；
图36是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的方法的过程示例的 流程图；
图37是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的方法的过程示例的流程图；
图38是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的方法的过程示例的流程图；
图39是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧的方法的过程示例的流程图；
图40是示出作为本公开的实施例中可采用的信息处理设备的个人计算机的示例结构的框图
图41是示出可以应用本公开的技术的演进型节点(eNB)的示意性配置的第一示例的框图；
图42是示出可以应用本公开的技术的eNB的示意性配置的第二示例的框图；
图43是示出可以应用本公开的技术的智能电话的示意性配置的示例的框图；以及
图44是示出可以应用本公开的技术的汽车导航设备的示意性配置的示例的框图。
具体实施方式
在下文中将结合附图对本公开的示范性实施例进行描述。为了清楚和简明起见，在说明书中并未描述实际实施方式的所有特征。然而，应该了解，在开发任何这种实际实施例的过程中必须做出很多特定于实施方式的决定，以便实现开发人员的具体目标，例如，符合与系统及业务相关的那些限制条件，并且这些限制条件可能会随着实施方式的不同而有所改变。此外，还应该了解，虽然开发工作有可能是非常复杂和费时的，但对得益于本公开内容的本领域技术人员来说，这种开发工作仅仅是例行的任务。
在此，还需要说明的一点是，为了避免因不必要的细节而模糊了本公开，在附图中仅仅示出了与根据本公开的方案密切相关的设备结构和/或处理步骤，而省略了与本公开关系不大的其它细节。
在具体描述本公开的实施例之前，为了便于理解本公开的内容，将对“透 明”MU-MIMO传输和“非透明”MU-MIMO传输进行简要介绍。
在“透明”MU-MIMO传输中，如图1所示，基站同时调度多个UE进行下行MU-MIMO传输。其中，针对UE k的一层信号流和其他三层信号流(这三层信号流可以是针对一个或多个其他用户设备的)通过空间复用共用相同的时频资源，但UE k本身并不知道其他层的存在(这些层在图1中以虚线指示)，即，UE k并不知道来自其他层的确切干扰。这样，在检测下行信道时，UE k的接收机仅尝试恢复出基站发送给UE k的下行信号，无法针对层间干扰进行有效的处理。
在“非透明”MU-MIMO传输中，如图2所示，基站在相同的时频资源上调度UE k和其他一个或多个用户设备的信号流，并同时通知UE k其他层的存在(这些层在图2中以实线指示)，使得UE k的接收机能够通过对来自其他层的干扰进行处理而恢复出基站发送给UE k的下行信号。
“非透明”MU-MIMO传输相较于“透明”MU-MIMO传输的优点在于：非透明传输下的UE可以知道多用户间的干扰情况，从而可以使用更为先进的接收机来抑制或消除多用户间的干扰，从而提高整个系统的吞吐量和可靠性；以及通过知晓多用户的情况，使得多用户之间的干扰测量成为可能，这里的干扰测量是基于DMRS的。可能存在的缺点在于：为了使得多用户传输中的UE可以知道与其共享调度时频资源的其他用户，需要额外的信令通知；以及先进的接收机往往会带来更大的检测复杂度，使得接收机消耗更多的计算和时间资源。
因此，在本公开的至少一方面的实施例中，解决了以更小的信令开销和更少的计算和时间资源来实现数据信道的“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，以优化“非透明”MU-MIMO传输。
在下文中，将按照以下顺序进行描述。然而，应指出，尽管为了便于描述而按照以下章节顺序分别描述本公开的实施例，但是这样的章节划分和顺序并不构成对本公开的限制。相反，在实际实施本公开的技术时，本领域技术人员可以根据本公开的原理和实际情况而对下述实施例进行组合，除非这些实施例是相互抵触的。
1.下行数据信道的“非透明”MU-MIMO传输(第一实施例)
1-1.第一示例方案
1-2.第二示例方案
1-3.第三示例方案
1-4.第四示例方案
2.下行控制信道的MU-MIMO传输(第二实施例)
2-1.第一示例方案
2-2.第二示例方案
2-3.第二示例方案的变型例
2-4.第三示例方案
3.根据本公开的方法实施例
3-1.第一实施例
3-2.第二实施例
4.用以实施本公开的装置和方法的实施例的计算设备
5.本公开的技术的应用示例
5-1.关于基站的应用示例
5-2.关于用户设备的应用示例
接下来，将参照图1至图44详细描述根据本公开的实施例。
[1.下行数据信道的“非透明”MU-MIMO传输(第一实施例)]
图3是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的功能配置示例的框图。
如图3所示，根据该示例的装置300可以包括确定单元302和解码单元304。
应指出，图3所示的装置中的各个功能单元仅是根据其所实现的具体功能而划分的逻辑模块，而不是用于限制具体的实现方式。在实际实现时，上述各个功能单元和模块可被实现为独立的物理实体，或者也可由单个实体(例如，处理器(CPU或DSP等)、集成电路等)来实现，这同样适用于随后关于用户 设备侧的其他配置示例的描述。下面将详细描述各个功能单元的配置示例。
确定单元302可被配置成根据来自基站的关于目标用户设备与其他用户设备同时被调度进行MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，确定其他用户设备的传输相关配置，该控制信息包括间接地指示其他用户设备的传输相关配置的信息。
目前，在LTE系统中，基站通过下行控制信道来向MU-MIMO传输中的各个UE通知其对应的DMRS端口号、加扰ID和该UE的信号流所占的层数。优选地，这里的传输相关配置包括DMRS配置。DMRS配置可以优选地直接指的是DMRS端口号(port index)。替选地，该DMRS配置也可以是指用于生成DMRS的伪随机序列及相应正交覆盖码(OCC)的信息。其中，一个伪随机序列能够应用多个OCC码生成多个正交的DMRS，因此同一伪随机序列可以用于多个UE。
应指出，为了便于描述，在以下的详细描述中将以DMRS端口号作为传输相关配置的示例来描述本公开的技术，但是应理解，这并不构成对本公开的任何限制，该描述同样适用于以其他形式的信息来表示用户设备的DMRS配置的情况。
为了使得目标UE能够得知其他UE的DMRS配置以实现“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，作为一种最直接且简单的方式，可以将其他UE的DMRS配置(例如，DMRS端口号)通过下行控制信道一一通知给目标UE。然而，尤其是在NR系统的大数据量传输业务中，MU-MIMO传输的信号流的总层数往往较大，换言之，DMRS端口的数量较大，这种一一进行通知的方式会导致较大的信令开销，造成宝贵的物理层信令资源的浪费，从而可能不适合于NR中具有大数据量传输需求的应用场景。
鉴于此，在本公开的方案中，提出了在目标UE的关于MU-MIMO传输的控制信息中包括间接地指示其他用户设备的DMRS配置的信息，以便以尽量小的信令开销使得目标UE能够基于该控制信息获知其他用户设备的DMRS配置。
解码单元304可被配置成基于所确定的其他用户设备的传输相关配置，对从基站接收到的利用MU-MIMO传输而发送的信号进行解码，以获取针对用户设备的信号部分。
将以串行干扰消除为例来进一步详细地描述解码单元304的解码操作。
假设目标UE为k，并且从基站接收到的利用MU-MIMO传输而发送的信号如下所示：
Figure PCTCN2019074664-appb-000001
其中，H k为基站到UE k的信道，P k为UE k的预编码向量，n k为UE k的接收机噪声；另外，H kP ix i为在MU-MIMO传输中来自UE i的干扰。UE k在获知了UE i的DMRS配置信息的情况下，可以首先估计出来自UE i的干扰等效信道，即H kP i，并尝试解码出UE i的数据x i；如果UE k可以解码出x i并且估计出了H kP i，则可以恢复出UE i对于UE k的干扰，从而可以在上式中将该干扰减去。通过依次消除来自i≠k的所有UE的干扰，可以得到：
y′ k＝H kP kx k+n k
接下来，UE k可以使用常规的线性接收机W来解码得到基站发送给UE k的数据：
Figure PCTCN2019074664-appb-000002
应指出，这里所给出的基于关于MU-MIMO传输中的其他干扰用户设备的DMRS配置信息来解码出目标数据流的解码操作仅为示例，本领域技术人员也可以采用其他本领域公知的或未来可能出现的其他解码操作、基于干扰UE的DMRS配置信息来解码目标数据流，本公开不对具体的解码方式进行限制。
这里，还应指出，上述用户设备侧的装置300可以以芯片级来实现，或者也可以以设备级来实现。例如，装置300可以工作为用户设备本身，并且还可以包括诸如存储器、收发器(可选的，在图3中以虚线框示出)等外部设备。存储器可以用于存储用户设备实现各种功能需要执行的程序和相关数据信息。收发器可以包括一个或多个通信接口以支持与不同设备(例如，基站、其他用户设备等等)间的通信，这里不具体限制收发器的实现形式。这同样适用于随后关于用户设备侧的其他配置示例的描述。
与上述图3所示的用户设备侧的装置的配置示例相对应的，本公开还提供 了以下基站侧的配置示例。图4是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置的功能配置示例的框图。
如图4所示，根据该示例的装置400可以包括控制信息生成单元402和传输控制单元404。
同样地，应指出，图4所示的装置中的各个功能单元仅是根据其所实现的具体功能而划分的逻辑模块，而不是用于限制具体的实现方式。在实际实现时，上述各个功能单元或模块可被实现为独立的物理实体，或者也可由单个实体(例如，处理器(CPU或DSP等)、集成电路等)来实现，这同样适用于随后关于基站侧的其他配置示例的描述。下面将详细描述各个功能单元的配置示例。
控制信息生成单元402可以被配置成针对被同时调度进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备内的一个或多个用户设备中的每个用户设备，生成关于MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，并且控制基站将所生成的控制信息发送至该用户设备。其中，所生成的控制信息包括间接地指示一组用户设备内除该用户设备之外的其他用户设备的传输相关配置的信息。优选地，这里的传输相关配置包括DMRS配置。
在一些示例中，对于被同时调度进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备，其中的各个用户设备的接收机可能具有不同的处理能力。对于接收机处理能力较弱的一些用户设备，即使告知了组内其他UE的DMRS配置，这些用户设备的接收机可能也无法通过例如上述线性干扰消除方式来解码出其目标数据流。此时，如果仍将来自干扰UE的DMRS配置通过控制信道通知给这些用户设备，实际上是对物理层信令资源的浪费。因此，对于这部分用户设备，优选地可以配置“透明”MU-MIMO传输，即，仅告知这些用户设备其自身的DMRS配置。
另一方面，对于其他接收机处理能力强的用户设备，可以优选地配置本公开所提出的“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，即，将间接地指示组内其他UE的传输相关配置的信息包括在控制信息中通知给这些用户设备，以使得这些用户设备可以获知和消除来自其他UE的干扰。上述“一组用户设备的一个或多个用户设备”即表示这部分能够支持并实现“非透明”MU-MIMO传输的用户设备。此外，在本说明书中，当提及“目标用户设备”时，通常指的是这一个或多个用户 设备中的任意用户设备。
这样，在根据本公开的数据信道的MU-MIMO传输中，同时存在“透明”MU-MIMO传输和“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，也可以称为混合透明MU-MIMO(hybrid transparent MU-MIMO)传输。
然而，应指出，在进行MU-MIMO传输的全组用户设备的接收机处理能力均较强从而能够支持并实现“非透明”MU-MIMO传输的情况下，基站侧的控制信息生成单元402也可以针对全组用户设备中的每一个用户设备均生成上述控制信息。基站可以根据所掌握的用户设备的相关信息，灵活地确定哪些UE需要进行“透明”MU-MIMO传输以及哪些UE可以应用本公开的技术进行“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，本公开对此不做具体限制。
传输控制单元404可以被配置成控制基站在相同的特定传输资源上同时向一组用户设备发送各自的信号。
这样，接收到所生成的控制信息的用户设备可以获知组内其他用户设备的DMRS配置，进而通过将与其目标信号叠加在一起传输的针对其他用户设备的信号作为干扰消除而从所接收到的信号中解调出目标信号。另一方面，对于被配置成执行“透明”MU-MIMO传输的用户设备，则直接根据自身的DMRS配置而尝试从所接收到的叠加信号中恢复出目标信号。
应指出，这里所描述的基站侧的装置的配置示例是与上述用户设备侧的装置的配置示例相对应的，因此在此未详细描述的内容可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
此外，还应指出，上述基站侧的装置400可以以芯片级来实现，或者也可以以设备级来实现。例如，装置400可以工作为基站本身，并且还可以包括诸如存储器、收发器(可选的，在图4中以虚线框示出)等外部设备。存储器可以用于存储基站实现各种功能需要执行的程序和相关数据信息。收发器可以包括一个或多个通信接口以支持与不同设备(例如，用户设备、其他基站等等)间的通信，这里不具体限制收发器的实现形式。这同样适用于随后关于基站侧的其他配置示例的描述。
作为示例而非限制，下面将分别详细描述用于实现间接地指示干扰UE的DMRS配置的第一至第四示例方案。但是，应理解，本领域技术人员能够根据本公开的原理而对这些示例方案进行适当的修改，以得到其他用于间接地指示 干扰UE的DMRS配置的方案，这样的修改显然应当认为落入本公开的保护范围内。
(1-1.第一示例方案)
在第一示例方案中，来自基站的控制信息可以包括目标用户设备的DMRS配置和MU-MIMO传输的总层数。在MU-MIMO传输中，一层数据流对应于一个DMRS端口，因此，这里的MU-MIMO传输的总层数也可以认为是DMRS配置或DMRS端口的总数，或者数据流的总个数。下面将详细描述如何根据目标用户设备的DMRS配置和MU-MIMO传输的总层数推出其他干扰用户设备的DMRS配置。
图5是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图5所示，根据该示例的装置500可以包括确定单元502和解码单元504。解码单元504的功能配置示例与以上参照图3描述的解码单元304的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
确定单元502可以进一步包括DMRS分配方案获取模块5021、DMRS配置集合确定模块5022和DMRS配置确定模块5023。
DMRS分配方案获取模块5021可以被配置成通过从基站进行接收或者从存储器进行读取来获取用于MU-MIMO传输的DMRS分配方案。
这里的DMRS分配方案可以表示DMRS端口的分配方式，可以是基站通过高层信令(例如，RRC层信令)动态配置的，或者也可以是预先存储在存储器中的默认分配方式。在由基站通过高层信令动态配置的情况下，DMRS分配方案获取模块5021可以通过对来自基站的高层信令进行解码来获取该DMRS分配方案。
DMRS配置集合确定模块5022可以被配置成根据至少DMRS分配方案和总层数，确定用于MU-MIMO传输的DMRS配置集合。这里的DMRS配置集合是指参与MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备的DMRS配置构成的集合。
DMRS配置确定模块5023可以被配置成将DMRS配置集合中不同于用户设备的DMRS配置的DMRS配置确定为其他用户设备的DMRS配置。
作为一种示例实现，DMRS分配方案可以包括DMRS配置的序列，该序列表示按顺序排列的可用于一次MU-MIMO传输的多个DMRS配置，并且DMRS配置集合确定模块5022可以根据预定顺序从DMRS配置的序列中读取数量等于总层数的DMRS配置作为DMRS配置集合。
举例来说，在LTE系统中，8个DMRS端口的编号为天线端口7到14。假设基站通过RRC信令配置的DMRS配置序列为[7,8,11,13,9,10,12,14]，MU-MIMO传输的总层数为6层，并且预先约定的或者基站所配置的使用顺序为例如从序列末端开始依次读取，则DMRS配置集合确定模块5022从该序列中读取后6个DMRS配置11,13,9,10,12,14作为此次MU-MIMO传输的DMRS配置集合。假设目标用户设备的DMRS端口号为10，则目标用户设备的DMRS配置确定模块5023可以将编号11,13,9,12,14确定为其他用户设备的干扰数据流对应的DMRS端口。在NR系统中，DMRS端口的编号与LTE系统不同，其DMRS端口索引为1000～1011，然而可以适用本公开以LTE系统为例描述的各种示例，简洁起见不再赘述。
作为另一种示例实现，DMRS分配方案可以包括DMRS配置的序列，该序列可以不表示其中的DMRS配置的使用顺序，并且上述控制信息除了包括目标UE的DMRS配置和总层数之外，还可以包括在该配置序列中MU-MIMO传输的起始层序号。在该情况下，DMRS配置集合确定模块5022可以进一步被配置成从DMRS配置的序列中对应于起始层序号的DMRS配置开始，从DMRS配置的序列中顺序读取数量等于总层数的DMRS配置作为DMRS配置集合。
更具体而言，仍以上述配置的DMRS配置序列[7,8,11,13,9,10,12,14]为例，每一个DMRS端口在该序列中的序号可以认为对应于MU-MIMO传输的层序号。例如，DMRS端口7对应于层1，DMRS端口11对应于层3，等等。假设MU-MIMO传输的总层数为6，起始层序号为2，则DMRS配置集合确定模块5022从该序列中的第二个DMRS端口开始依次读取6个DMRS配置8,11,13,9,10,12作为用于该MU-MIMO传输的DMRS配置集合。假设目标用户设备的DMRS端口号为10，则目标用户设备的DMRS配置确定模块5023可以将编号8,11,13,9,12确定为其他用户设备的干扰数据流对应的DMRS端口。
根据该示例实现，通过在控制信息中进一步指定MU-MIMO传输的起始 层序号，可以支持更灵活地使用DMRS配置用于MU-MIMO传输。
作为又一示例实现，DMRS分配方案可以包括指示DMRS配置的使用顺序的信息。例如，DMRS分配方案指示DMRS端口的使用顺序为按照编号从小到大(7至14)的顺序使用，或者为按照编号从大到小(14至7)的顺序使用，或者为指定的特定顺序，例如，表示使用顺序的序列[7,8,11,13,9,10,12,14]。在该情况下，DMRS配置集合确定模块502可以进一步被配置成根据DMRS分配方案指示的使用顺序，获取数量等于总层数的DMRS配置构成DMRS配置集合。
更具体而言，假设DMRS分配方案指示的DMRS端口的使用顺序为从小到大，并且总层数为6，则DMRS配置集合确定模块5022可以直接获取7,8,9,10,11,12作为用于MU-MIMO传输的DMRS配置集合。假设目标用户设备的DMRS端口号为10，则目标用户设备的DMRS配置确定模块5023可以将编号7,8,9,11,12确定为其他用户设备的干扰数据流对应的DMRS端口。
以上作为示例描述了根据目标用户设备的DMRS配置以及MU-MIMO传输的总层数来间接地推出组内其他用户设备的DMRS配置的示例实现方案，但是应理解，以上示例仅是为了说明的目的而非限制，本领域技术人员可以根据本公开的原理、结合实际情况而对上述示例实现方案进行适当的修改，并且这样的修改显然应当认为落入本公开的范围内。
与上述用户设备侧的装置的配置示例相对应的，下面将详细描述第一示例方案中基站侧的装置的配置示例。图6是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图6所示，根据该示例的装置600可以包括控制信息生成单元602和传输控制单元604。传输控制单元604的功能配置示例与以上参照图4描述的传输控制单元404的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
控制信息生成单元602可被配置成针对进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备中的目标用户设备，通过包含该用户设备的DMRS配置和MU-MIMO传输的总层数来生成控制信息，并且控制基站将所生成的控制信息发送至目标用户设备，以便目标用户设备根据该控制信息以及预先存储的或由基站配置的DMRS分配方案来推出组内其他干扰UE的DMRS配置。
优选地，在由基站来配置DMRS分配方案的情况下，装置600还可以包 括DMRS分配方案生成单元606。
DMRS分配方案生成单元606可以被配置成生成用于MU-MIMO传输的DMRS分配方案，并且控制基站将所生成的DMRS分配方案发送至目标用户设备，以供该用户设备基于至少DMRS分配方案、该用户设备的DMRS配置和总层数来确定一组用户设备内的其他用户设备的DMRS配置。
优选地，DMRS分配方案生成单元606通过将所生成的DMRS分配方案包括在高层信令(例如，RRC信令)中而发送至目标用户设备。
作为一种示例实现，所生成的DMRS分配方案可以包括DMRS配置的序列，从而用户设备可以根据预定顺序从该序列读取数量等于总层数的DMRS配置作为用于MU-MIMO传输的DMRS配置集合。
作为另一示例实现，所生成的DMRS分配方案可以包括DMRS配置的序列，并且控制信息生成单元602可以进一步配置成除了包含目标UE的DMRS配置和总层数之外，还通过包含在DMRS配置序列中MU-MIMO传输的起始层序号来生成控制信息，从而用户设备可以从对应于起始层序号的DMRS配置开始，在该DMRS配置序列中依次读取数量等于总层数的DMRS配置作为用于MU-MIMO传输的DMRS配置集合。
作为又一示例实现，所生成的DMRS分配方案可以包括DMRS配置的使用顺序的信息，从而用户设备可以根据该使用顺序读取数量等于总层数的DMRS配置作为用于MU-MIMO传输的DMRS配置集合。
应指出，图6所示的DMRS分配方案生成单元606是可选的(在图6中以虚线框示出)。在DMRS分配方案是预先配置且存储在用户设备侧的存储器中的情况下，也可省略该单元。
另外，还应指出，这里参照图6所述的基站侧的配置示例是与以上参照图5描述的用户设备侧的配置示例相对应的，因此在此未详细描述的内容可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
为了进一步便于理解上述第一示例方案，以下将参照图7所示的流程图来描述用于实现第一示例方案的信令交互过程。图7是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用于实现第一示例方案的信令交互过程的流程图。
如图7所示，首先，在步骤S701中，在建立RRC连接之后，基站通过RRC信令向用户设备k(UE k)通知DMRS分配方案。然后，在步骤S702中， 基站向用户设备k发送下行参考信号(例如，信道状态信息-参考信号CSI-RS)以获取信道状态。在步骤S703中，用户设备k将测量得到的信道状态信息反馈给基站。基站综合多个用户设备上报的信道状态信息进行MU-MIMO传输调度，并且在步骤S704中将包括用户设备k的DMRS配置和MU-MIMO传输总层数的控制信息发送至用户设备k。该控制信息可以包括在PDCCH上传输的用户专属下行控制信息(UE-specific DCI)中。然后，在步骤S705中，基站根据所确定的MU-MIMO传输配置，在相同时频资源上向包括用户设备k的一组用户设备进行下行数据传输。用户设备k可以通过对所接收到的DCI进行解码而获知自身以及组内其他UE的DMRS配置，进而根据这些信息对所接收到的数据信息进行解调。
应指出，以上参照图7描述的信令交互过程仅为示例而非限制，本领域技术人员可以根据上述本公开的原理、结合实际情况而对上述交互过程进行修改。例如，图7中所编号的各个步骤仅是为了便于描述而不意味着对执行顺序的限制。又例如，为了避免模糊本公开的主题，在上述流程图中省略了与本公开的技术相关性较低的一些交互过程。再者，上述流程图中的一些步骤可以省略。例如，在DMRS分配方案为预先配置且存储的情况下，上述步骤S701中的DMRS分配方案的配置可以省略(在图7中步骤S701以虚线示出)。所有这样的修改均应认为落入本公开的范围内，这里不再一一列举。
根据以上描述的第一示例方案，可以看出，通过利用目标UE自身的DMRS配置和MU-MIMO传输的总层数来间接地向目标UE指示组内其他UE的DMRS配置，可以以较小的信令开销来实现“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，有利于优化MU-MIMO传输的系统性能。
(1-2.第二示例方案)
在本公开的第二示例方案中，提出了利用干扰测量资源来间接地向目标UE通知组内其他干扰UE的传输相关配置信息。优选地，该干扰测量资源可以包括非零功率CSI-RS(Non-Zero Power CSI-RS,NZP CSI-RS)资源。此外，干扰测量资源还可以包括信道状态信息-干扰测量(Channel State Information–Interference Measurement，CSI-IM)资源。下面将以NZP CSI-RS资源作为干 扰测量资源的示例来描述本公开的技术，但是应理解，这仅是示例而非限制，并且以下描述的技术可以类似地应用于其他干扰测量资源。
目前在NR系统中，已经支持了基于NZP CSI-RS的多用户干扰测量。因此，本公开提出了可以基于在多用户干扰测量中选择的CSI-RS资源来间接地指示MU-MIMO传输中的干扰信息，从而用户设备可以根据关于CSI-RS资源的信息而间接地推出干扰UE的数据流对应的DMRS配置。
具体来说，可以预先建立CSI-RS资源或者用于发送CSI-RS资源的天线端口(也称为CSI-RS端口)与DMRS端口之间的映射关系。图8是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的CSI-RS资源或者CSI-RS端口与DMRS端口之间的映射关系的示例的示意图。
作为一种示例实现，可以建立CSI-RS资源与DMRS端口之间的映射关系。例如，如图8所示，以NR系统为例，CSI-RS资源1映射到DMRS端口1007、1008、1011；CSI-RS资源2映射到DMRS端口1007、1003；CSI-RS资源3映射到DMRS端口1011、1004。
替选地，作为另一示例实现，也可以建立CSI-RS端口与DMRS端口之间的映射关系。CSI-RS支持1、2、4、8、12、16、24以及32天线端口的一部分或者全部的设定，例如CSI-RS支持32天线端口，即CSI-RS可以由32个天线端口发送。在LTE中，利用天线端口15～46(端口编号为15～46)当中的1个或者多个发送CSI-RS。此外，被支持的天线端口也可以根据终端装置的终端装置能力、RRC参数的设定以及/或者设定的传输模式等决定。在NR中，共有32个CSI-RS端口(NR系统中实际天线端口编号为3000～3031)和12个DMRS端口(NR系统中实际天线端口编号为1000～1011)，从而可以实现CSI-RS端口到DMRS端口的映射。例如，一个CSI-RS端口可以被唯一地映射到一个DMRS端口，而一个DMRS端口可以被映射到多个CSI-RS端口，从而可以根据CSI-RS端口而唯一地确定与之对应的DMRS端口。例如，如图8所示，CSI-RS端口3015和3018均映射到DMRS端口1007，CSI-RS端口3016映射到DMRS端口1008，CSI-RS端口3017和3030均映射到DMRS端口1011，等等，在此不再一一列举。
此外，应指出，CSI-RS资源与CSI-RS端口之间也存在一定的对应关系，该对应关系可以由基站通过RRC预先配置。这样，无论所建立的映射关系是 CSI-RS资源还是CSI-RS端口与DMRS端口之间的映射关系，用户设备都可以根据来自基站的关于CSI-RS资源或CSI-RS端口的指示信息以及该映射关系来确定对应的DMRS端口。
接下来，在多用户干扰测量阶段，基站可以在RRC层为多个用户设备配置对应于多种多用户组合的多个干扰测量资源，例如，CSI-RS资源。这些CSI-RS资源或者CSI-RS端口与DMRS端口之间存在基站和用户设备共知的映射关系。
每一个CSI-RS资源可对应于一种MU组合。如图8所示，NZP CSI-RS资源1对应于包括UE 1、UE m和UE n的MU组合，NZP CSI-RS资源2对应于包括UE 2和UE 4的MU组合；并且NZP CSI-RS资源3对应于包括UE j和UE t的MU组合。用户设备对多个CSI-RS资源进行测量并将测量结果上报给基站。基站在接收到多个用户设备上报的测量结果后运行多用户调度算法，以确定要进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备。然后，基站可以从所配置的多个CSI-RS资源中选择与MU调度结果对应的CSI-RS资源并将所选择的CSI-RS资源通知给用户设备，用户设备可以根据已知的映射关系而获知参与MU-MIMO传输的其他UE的DMRS端口，从而实现“非透明”MU-MIMO传输。
应指出，在上述第二示例方案中，基于NZP CSI-RS的天线端口来模仿数据信道的MU-MIMO传输时的干扰，对NZP CSI-RS使用与DMRS一致的波束赋形。NZP CSI-RS与DMRS应该占用相同或相近的频带资源，如占用相同的子带资源。
下面将分别详细描述用于实现上述第二示例方案的用户设备侧和基站侧的配置示例。
图9是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图9所示，根据该示例的装置900可以包括确定单元902和解码单元904。其中，解码单元904的功能配置示例与以上参照图3描述的解码单元304的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再赘述。
确定单元902可以被配置成基于来自基站的控制信息而确定干扰UE的传输相关配置，该控制信息可以包括指示基站从一个或多个干扰测量资源中选择的干扰测量资源的信息或指示用于发送所选择的干扰测量资源的天线端口的 信息。
优选地，干扰测量资源可以包括NZP CSI-RS资源。此外，优选地，指示所选择的干扰测量资源的信息可以包括CSI-RS资源指示符(CSI-RS Resource Indicator，CRI)，从而基站可以将所选择的CSI-RS资源的CRI包括在例如用户专属下行控制信息(UE-specific DCI)中以通知给目标UE。
将参照图10来详细描述确定单元902的具体功能配置示例。图10是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置中的确定单元的具体功能配置示例的框图。
如图10所示，确定单元902可以进一步包括映射关系获取模块1001和DMRS配置确定模块1002。
映射关系获取模块1001可以被配置成通过从基站进行接收或者从存储器进行读取，获取指示干扰测量资源或用于发送干扰测量资源的天线端口与DMRS配置之间的映射关系的信息。
具体而言，以上参照图8描述的CSI-RS资源或CSI-RS端口与DMRS端口之间的映射关系可以预先存储在用户设备侧的存储器中，或者也可以由基站通过高层信令(例如，RRC信令)动态配置。在由基站动态配置的情况下，映射关系获取模块1001可以通过对来自基站的高层信令(例如，RRC信令)进行解码来获取该映射关系。
DMRS配置确定模块1002可以被配置成基于所获取的映射关系，将与基站选择的干扰测量资源对应的DMRS配置确定为其他用户设备的DMRS配置。
具体而言，作为示例，返回参照图8，假如来自基站的控制信息中包括的CRI指示所选择的干扰测量资源为CSI-RS资源1，并且所获取的映射关系为CSI-RS资源与DMRS端口之间的映射关系，则DMRS配置确定模块1022可以直接确定与CSI-RS资源1对应的DMRS端口为7、8、11，并将这三个端口确定为组内的干扰UE的DMRS配置。替选地，如果所获取的映射关系为CSI-RS端口与DMRS端口之间的映射关系，则DMRS配置确定模块1002需要先根据基站通过RRC配置的或预先存储的CSI-RS资源与CSI-RS端口之间的对应关系，确定与CRI指示的CSI-RS资源对应的CSI-RS端口，进而根据CSI-RS端口与DMRS端口之间的映射关系，将与这些CSI-RS端口对应的 DMRS端口确定为干扰UE的DMRS配置。
另一方面，在来自基站的控制信息中包括指示CSI-RS端口的信息的情况下，可以类似地确定干扰UE的DMRS配置，在此不再详细论述。
应指出，优先利用CRI来间接地指示干扰UE的DMRS配置，以便减少物理层的信令开销。
返回参照图9，优选地，装置900还可包括干扰测量单元906。干扰测量单元906可以被配置成基于基站配置的干扰测量资源进行多用户干扰测量并将测量结果上报至基站，以供基站基于测量结果从所配置的多个干扰测量资源中进行选择。将参照图11详细描述干扰测量单元906的功能配置示例。图11是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置中的干扰测量单元的具体功能配置示例的框图。
如图11所示，根据该示例的干扰测量单元906可以包括干扰测量资源获取模块1101、测量模块1102和控制模块1103。
干扰测量资源获取模块1101可以被配置成通过对从基站接收的高层信令进行解码，获取一个或多个干扰测量资源。
具体而言，作为示例，假设基站通过高层RRC信令为用户设备配置了M个NZP CSI-RS资源，即，CSI-RS资源1至CSI-RS资源M，从而干扰测量资源获取模块1101可以通过解码RRC信令而获取M个NZP CSI-RS资源。
测量模块1102可以被配置成基于一个或多个干扰测量资源进行干扰测量，并生成与一个或多个干扰测量资源中的每个干扰测量资源对应的测量结果指示。
具体地，作为示例，测量模块1102可以分别对M个CSI-RS资源进行测量，并生成与M个CSI-RS资源对应的测量结果指示。优选地，测量结果指示可以包括多用户信道质量指示(MU-CQI)、参考信号接收功率(RSRP)和参考信号接收质量(RSRQ)中至少之一。这里以MU-CQI为例，则测量模块1102生成分别与M个CSI-RS资源对应的MU-CQI 1至MU-CQI M。
控制模块1103可以被配置成控制用户设备将一个或多个测量结果指示中的全部或一部分反馈至基站，以供基站从一个或多个干扰测量资源中选择所选择的干扰测量资源。
具体而言，作为示例，控制模块1103可以控制用户设备将全部的M个 MU-CQI都上报至基站，以由基站综合来自其他用户设备的测量结果以及具体网络状况而从M个CSI-RS资源中选择适当的CSI-RS资源。另一方面，为了减少传输开销和处理开销，控制模块1103也可以控制用户设备仅上报一部分MU-CQI给基站，例如，仅上报大于预定阈值的MU-CQI，从而基站仅从接收到其测量结果的CSI-RS资源中进行选择。
与上述用户设备侧的配置示例相对应的，以下将描述基站侧的配置示例。图12是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图12所示，根据该示例的装置1200可以包括控制信息生成单元1202和传输控制单元1204。其中，传输控制单元1204的功能配置示例与以上参照图4描述的传输控制单元404的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
控制信息生成单元1202可以被配置成基于多用户干扰测量而生成关于MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，以间接地向目标UE指示干扰UE的传输相关配置。
下面将参照图13详细描述控制信息生成单元1202的具体功能配置示例。图13是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置中的控制信息生成单元的具体功能配置示例的框图。
如图13所示，根据该示例的控制信息生成单元1202可包括资源配置模块1301、资源选择模块1302和控制信息生成模块1303。
资源配置模块1301可被配置成为要进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备中的每个用户设备配置一个或多个干扰测量资源。
具体地，资源配置模块1301可以通过例如高层RRC信令为每个用户设备配置多个例如NZP CSI-RS资源，这多个CSI-RS资源可对应于多种MU组合。
资源选择模块1302可被配置成针对目标用户设备，根据该用户设备以及其他用户设备基于所配置的一个或多个干扰测量资源而反馈的测量结果指示，从一个或多个干扰测量资源中选择干扰测量资源即选择MU-MIMO传输的多用户组合，并且生成所选择的干扰测量资源的指示信息或用于发送所选择的干扰测量资源的天线端口的指示信息。
具体地，基站基于所配置的多个CSI-RS资源向各个用户设备发送下行参考信号CSI-RS，并接收各个用户设备上报的对多个CSI-RS资源中的一个或多 个的测量结果指示，该测量结果指示可以包括MU-CQI、RSRP和RSRQ中至少之一。然后，基站侧的资源选择模块1302可以基于多个用户设备上报的例如MU-CQI，通过利用已知的MU调度算法而确定要进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备，从而即确定了针对目标用户设备的CSI-RS资源。具体的MU调度算法可参见现有技术中的相关描述，这里不再详细描述。
控制信息生成模块1303可被配置成针对所确定的一组用户设备中的目标用户设备，通过包含该指示信息来生成控制信息。
具体而言，控制信息生成模块1303可将所选择的CSI-RS资源的指示信息(例如，CRI)或对应的CSI-RS端口的指示信息(例如，CSI-RS port index)包括在控制信息中，以例如通过PDCCH上的UE-specific DCI发送给目标用户设备，从而目标用户设备可以通过解码所接收到的DCI而获取其中包括的CRI或CSI-RS port index，进而结合已知的映射关系确定干扰UE的DMRS配置。
返回参照图12，优选地，装置1200还可以包括映射关系配置单元1206。
映射关系配置单元1206可被配置成针对目标用户设备，生成指示干扰测量资源或用于发送干扰测量资源的天线端口与DMRS配置之间的映射关系的信息，并且控制基站将指示映射关系的信息发送至目标用户设备，以供该用户设备基于该映射关系和控制信息所指示的CSI-RS资源或端口，确定组内的干扰UE的DMRS配置。
优选地，映射关系配置单元1206可通过高层信令来配置例如参照图8描述的映射关系。例如，将该映射关系包含在RRC信令中以发送至目标用户设备。
应指出，映射关系配置单元1206是可选的(在图12中以虚线框示出)。在映射关系是预先配置好的并且存储在用户设备侧的存储器中的情况下，用户设备可直接从存储器中读取该映射关系，从而可省略映射关系配置单元1206。
此外，还应指出，这里参照图12和图13描述的基站侧的配置示例是与上述用户设备侧的配置示例相对应的，因此在此未详细描述的内容可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
为了便于进一步理解上述第二示例方案，以下将参照图14所示的流程图来描述用于实现第二示例方案的信令交互过程。图14是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用于实现第二示例方案的信令交互过程的流程图。
如图14所示，首先，在建立RRC连接之后，在步骤S1401中，基站通过RRC信令向用户设备k配置例如M个NZP CSI-RS资源以及CSI-RS资源或CSI-RS端口与DMRS端口之间的映射关系。然后，在步骤S1402中，基站基于M个NZP CSI-RS资源向用户设备k发送下行参考信号CSI-RS。用户设备k分别对M个NZP CSI-RS资源进行测量，并在步骤S1403中将例如作为测量结果的MU-CQI上报给基站。用户设备k可以将全部M个MU-CQI均上报给基站，或者仅上报例如大于预定阈值的MU-CQI。基站综合多个用户设备上报的MU-CQI进行MU-MIMO传输调度，以从M个NZP CSI-RS资源中选择一个NZP CSI-RS资源，并且在步骤S1404中通过例如DCI将用户设备k自身的DMRS配置和包括例如所选择的CSI-RS资源的CRI的控制信息发送至用户设备k。然后，在步骤S1405中，基站在相同时频资源上向包括用户设备k的一组用户设备进行下行数据传输。用户设备k可以通过对所接收到的DCI进行解码而获知自身以及组内其他UE的DMRS配置，进而根据这些信息对所接收到的数据信息进行解调。
应指出，以上参照图14描述的信令交互过程仅为示例而非限制，本领域技术人员可以根据上述本公开的原理、结合实际情况而对上述交互过程进行修改。例如，图14中所编号的各个步骤仅是为了便于描述而不意味着对执行顺序的限制。又例如，为了避免模糊本公开的主题，在上述流程图中省略了与本公开的技术相关性较低的一些交互过程。再者，例如，在映射关系为预先配置且存储的情况下，在上述步骤S1401中，基站也可以不向用户设备通知映射关系。所有这样的修改均应认为落入本公开的范围内，这里不再一一列举。
根据上述本公开的第二示例方案，通过利用已有的基于干扰测量资源的多用户干扰测量以及预先建立干扰测量资源或对应的天线端口与DMRS配置之间的映射关系，利用干扰测量资源间接地向目标用户设备指示MU-MIMO传输中的干扰数据流对应的DMRS配置，能够在不显著增加处理负荷和信令开销的情况下使得用户设备能够获知相关干扰信息以实现“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，有利于优化系统性能。
(1-3.第三示例方案)
在本公开的第三示例方案中，提出了基于传输配置指示(Transmission Configuration Indicator，TCI)机制来间接地通知MU-MIMO传输的DMRS配置。下面将简单介绍现有的TCI机制。
在目前的3GPP 5G标准化进展中，确定了使用TCI来通知准共址(Quasi co-location，QCL)关系的机制。具体而言，两个天线端口在满足预定的条件的情况下能够表示为是准共址(QCL)。该预定的条件是某个天线端口中承载符号的传输信道的广域特性能够从其它天线端口中承载符号的传输信道推测出。广域的特性包括延迟扩展、多普勒扩展、多普勒频移、平均增益、平均延迟以及/或者空间接收。例如，如果TCI指示CSI-RS端口15与DMRS端口7在空间维度QCL，就是说这两个参考信号从发射端到接收端的空间特征一致。TCI是支持基站向用户设备通知QCL关系的一种机制。下面简要介绍一下现有的TCI机制。
例如，假设针对某一天线端口或者CSI-RS资源(例如，CSI-RS端口3015，或者CSI-RS资源ID5)，基站通过用户专属RRC(UE-specific RRC)分别为每个UE配置了M个TCI状态，这M个TCI状态包括{下行参考信号1|QCL_type1,下行参考信号2|QCL_type2,…下行参考信号M|QCL_typeM}，分别表示下行参考信号1与CSI-RS端口3015为QCL_type1的准共址，下行参考信号2与CSI-RS端口3015为QCL_type2的准共址，等等。
其中，下行参考信号可以包括CSI-RS、CRS、DMRS等等；QCL_type表示准共址类型。目前总共存在四种准共址类型。QCL类型A:多普勒频移、多普勒扩展、平均延迟、延迟扩展(频域和时域)；QCL类型B:多普勒频移、多普勒扩展(频域)；QCL type C:平均延迟、多普勒频移(简化的频域和时域)；以及QCL类型D:空间接收(空域)。
本公开的第三示例方案提出了利用上述TCI机制来间接地向用户设备指示MU-MIMO传输组的DMRS配置。下面将分别详细描述用于实现第三示例方案的用户设备侧和基站侧的配置示例。
图15是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图15所示，根据该示例的装置1500可包括确定单元1502和解码单元1504。解码单元1504的功能配置示例与以上参照图3描述的解码单元304的 功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
确定单元1502可包括TCI配置获取模块1521和和DMRS配置确定模块1522。
TCI配置获取模块1521可以被配置成从基站获取包括第一数量的TCI状态的TCI配置。该TCI配置中的每个TCI状态包括一个DMRS配置和准共址类型指示，该准共址类型指示用于表示该DMRS配置为MU-MIMO传输中的干扰DMRS配置。
具体而言，针对目标用户设备，基站可以通过用户专属RRC来配置包括例如第一数量的(这里记为M个)TCI状态的TCI配置，用于指示可用于MU-MIMO传输的M个DMRS端口。在本公开的方案中，TCI配置中的TCI状态用于指示MU-MIMO传输中的干扰DMRS配置，而不是用于表示两个天线端口之间的QCL关系。因此，作为一种示例实现方式，除了现有的四种准共址类型QCL类型A至D之外，可以增加一个准共址类型，例如，标记为QCL类型E，用于区别于现有的TCI用途。作为示例，所配置的M个TCI状态可以包括{DMRS 1|QCL_typeE,DMRS 2|QCL_typeE,…DMRS M|QCL_typeE}，以指示此时DMRS 1至DMRS M为MU-MIMO传输中的干扰端口。替选地，作为另一示例方式，在针对MU-MIMO传输的TCI配置中，每个TCI状态中包括的准共址类型也可以缺省，并在RRC信令中增加例如1比特的信息来指示所配置的TCI是用于指示QCL还是用于MU-MIMO传输。
这样，用户设备侧的TCI配置获取模块1521可以通过对来自基站的高层RRC信令进行解码而获取配置用于MU-MIMO传输的M个TCI状态，并了解这M个TCI状态所指示的DMRS端口可能用作MU-MIMO传输中的干扰端口。
DMRS配置确定模块1522可以被配置成根据来自基站的控制信息中所包括的指示TCI状态的使用配置的信息，将与所配置的第一数量的TCI状态中被使用的TCI状态对应的DMRS配置确定为其他用户设备的DMRS配置。
具体而言，针对目标用户设备，基站可以根据进行与其同时被调度进行MU-MIMO传输的其他UE的DMRS配置，生成指示在所配置的M个TCI状态中哪些TCI状态对应的DMRS配置用作其他UE的DMRS配置的使用配置信息。
优选地，作为一种示例实现，该使用配置信息可以是指示在M个TCI状 态中、其中包括的DMRS配置用作MU-MIMO传输中的干扰DMRS配置的TCI状态的数量的信息，并包括在UE-specific DCI中发送给用户设备，从而用户设备侧的DMRS配置确定模块1522可以根据预定顺序(例如，从大到小依次读取，从小到大依次读取，或者从头到尾依次读取等等)而从所配置的M个TCI状态中依次读取使用配置信息所指示数量的TCI状态，并且将与所读取的TCI状态对应的DMRS配置确定为干扰DMRS配置。
优选地，作为另一示例实现，该使用配置信息可以为位图(bitmap)形式的信息，例如，被使用的DMRS端口在位图中表示为1，未使用的DMRS端口在位图中表示为0。该使用配置信息可以包括在UE-specific DCI中发送给用户设备，从而用户设备侧的DMRS配置确定模块1522可以通过对来自基站的DCI进行解码而获取该位图信息，并将与位图信息中标记为“1”的TCI状态对应的DMRS端口确定为干扰DMRS端口。进而，用户设备可以进行相应的干扰消除和数据解调，从而借助于TCI机制实现了“非透明”MU-MIMO传输。
另外，应指出，DCI中用于指示TCI状态的使用配置的信息的比特可以是固定的，以便于用户设备对物理层信令的解调。例如，当使用配置信息用于指示所使用的TCI状态的数量时，可以固定为例如3比特，从而可以指示最多8个干扰DMRS配置。另一方面，当使用配置信息为位图信息时，可以固定为例如8比特。当M小于8时，表示M个TCI状态的使用配置的位图信息中不足的位数可以例如用0补齐。
另一方面，当M大于8时，为了节省物理层信令开销以及为了解决DCI中所预留的位数可能不足的问题，优选地，基站可以先利用用户专属的MAC层控制元素(MAC CE)从M个TCI状态中激活第二数量的(例如，N＝8个)TCI状态。该激活操作也可以以例如位图形式的信息来实现。例如，被激活的TCI状态表示为1，未激活的TCI状态表示为0。然后，基站再如上所述利用物理层的DCI向目标用户设备通知所激活的N个TCI状态在MU-MIMO传输中的使用配置。
因此，优选地，用户设备侧的确定单元1502还可以包括激活配置确定模块1523。
激活配置确定模块1523可以被配置成根据来自基站的指示TCI状态的激活配置的信息，确定第一数量的TCI状态中被激活的第二数量的TCI状态。 优选地，第二数量为8。
具体地，激活配置确定模块1523可以通过对来自基站的MAC CE进行解码而获取TCI状态的位图形式的激活配置信息，并将与比特“1”对应的TCI状态确定为被激活的TCI状态。这样，激活配置确定模块1523可以确定在M个TCI状态中被激活的例如8个TCI状态。
在该情况下，来自基站的指示TCI状态的使用配置的信息可以为指示所激活的8个TCI状态的使用配置的信息。例如，可以为指示这8个TCI状态中用于MU-MIMO传输的TCI状态的数量的信息(3比特)，或者可以为分别指示这8个TCI状态中的每个TCI状态是否用于MU-MIMO传输的位图信息(8比特)，从而DMRS配置确定模块1522可以根据该使用配置信息，从所激活的8个TCI状态中按预定顺序读取所指示数量的TCI状态，并将与其对应的DMRS配置确定为干扰DMRS配置；或者DMRS配置确定模块1522可以根据8比特的位图信息，将与所激活的8个TCI状态中标记为“1”的TCI状态对应的DMRS配置确定为其他用户设备的DMRS配置。
应指出，激活配置确定模块1523为可选的(在图15中以虚线框示出)。在M小于或等于8的情况下，基站无需利用MAC CE进行激活操作，从而用户设备侧也无需设置激活配置确定模块1523。
与上述用户设备侧的配置示例相对应的，以下将描述基站侧的配置示例。图16是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图16所示，根据该示例的装置1620可以包括控制信息生成单元1630和传输控制单元1640。其中，传输控制单元1640的功能配置示例与以上参照图4描述的传输控制单元404的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
控制信息生成单元1630可以进一步包括TCI配置生成模块1631、使用配置信息生成模块1632和控制信息生成模块1633。
TCI配置生成模块1631可被配置成生成包括第一数量的TCI状态的TCI配置，并控制基站将TCI配置发送至目标用户设备。在该TCI配置中，每个TCI状态包括一个DMRS配置和准共址类型指示，该准共址类型指示用于表示该DMRS配置为MU-MIMO传输中的干扰DMRS配置。
具体地，TCI配置生成模块1631可生成包括例如M个TCI状态的TCI 配置，并且将该TCI配置包括在例如用户专属的RRC信令以发送给目标用户设备。作为示例，所配置的M个TCI状态可以包括{DMRS 1|QCL_typeE,DMRS2|QCL_typeE,…DMRS M|QCL_typeE}，其中，QCL_typeE用于指示该DMRS端口为MU-MIMO传输中的干扰端口，以区分于现有技术中用于指示准共址类型的TCI状态。
使用配置信息生成模块1632可被配置成根据进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备中除目标UE之外的干扰UE的DMRS配置，生成指示第一数量的TCI状态的使用配置的信息。
优选地，例如，该使用配置信息可以是指示在第一数量的TCI状态中、其中包括的DMRS配置用作MU-MIMO传输中的干扰DMRS配置的TCI状态的数量的信息。或者，优选地，例如，指示TCI状态的使用配置的信息可以是位图信息。例如，使用配置信息生成模块1632可以通过将与干扰UE的DMRS配置对应的TCI状态标记为1而将其他未使用的TCI状态标记为0来生成该位图信息。
控制信息生成模块1633可以被配置成通过包括所生成的指示TCI状态的使用配置的信息而生成控制信息。优选地，该使用配置信息可以包括在用户专属DCI中发送至目标UE，用于间接地向目标UE指示MU-MIMO传输组内的干扰UE的DMRS配置，进而由目标UE进行干扰消除和数据解调以恢复目标数据流，从而实现了“非透明”MU-MIMO传输。
优选地，控制信息生成单元1630还可包括激活配置信息生成模块1634。激活配置信息生成模块1634可被配置成从第一数量的TCI状态中激活第二数量的TCI状态，并生成指示所激活的第二数量的TCI状态的激活配置信息。
具体地，当通过RRC配置的TCI状态的数量M过大时，例如，当M大于8时，为了节省物理层信令开销以及维持物理层信令格式的一致性，优选地，基站可以先从M个TCI状态中激活N(例如，N为8)个TCI状态，并通过例如位图形式的激活配置信息来表示该激活操作。例如，被激活的TCI状态在位图信息中表示为1，而未被激活的TCI状态在位图信息中表示为0。该位图形式的激活配置信息可以包括在用户专属的MAC CE中被发送至目标UE。
然后，使用配置信息生成模块1632可以根据MU-MIMO传输中的干扰UE的DMRS配置，生成指示所激活的TCI状态的使用情况的使用配置信息。 例如，生成指示所激活的N个TCI状态中用于MU-MIMO传输的TCI状态的数量的信息。又例如，在所激活的N个TCI状态中，与干扰DMRS配置对应的TCI状态被标记为1，而未被使用的TCI状态被标记为0，从而生成N比特的位图信息。
这样，目标UE可以根据从MAC层接收到的激活配置信息以及从物理层接收到的使用配置信息中确定干扰UE的DMRS配置，进而进行干扰消除和数据解调。
应指出，上述激活配置信息生成模块1634是可选的(在图16中以虚线框示出)。在通过RRC配置的TCI状态的数量小于或等于例如8的情况下，激活操作可省略，从而也无需设置激活配置信息生成模块1634。
此外，还应指出，这里参照图16描述的基站侧的配置示例是与上述用户设备侧的配置示例相对应的，因此在此未详细描述的内容可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
为了便于进一步理解上述第三示例方案，以下将参照图17所示的流程图来描述用于实现第三示例方案的信令交互过程。图17是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用于实现第三示例方案的信令交互过程的流程图。
如图17所示，首先，在建立RRC连接之后，在步骤S1701中，基站通过RRC信令向用户设备k配置包括例如M个TCI状态的用于MU-MIMO传输的TCI配置。然后，在步骤S1702中，基站从M个TCI状态中激活N个TCI状态，并将指示TCI状态的激活配置的信息包括在MAC CE中发送至用户设备k。接下来，在步骤S1703中，基站向用户设备k发送下行参考信号CSI-RS以获取信道状态信息，用户设备k在步骤S1704中将测量得到的信道状态信息发送至基站。然后，在步骤S1705中，基站基于用户设备k以及其他用户设备上报的信道状态信息并结合具体网络状况而进行MU-MIMO传输调度，从而根据调度结果生成指示所激活的N个TCI状态中的使用配置的信息，并将该使用配置信息包括在例如DCI中以发送给用户设备k，以向用户设备k指示MU-MIMO传输中的干扰DMRS配置。同时，在步骤S1706中，基站将包括用户设备k的DMRS配置的信息通过DCI发送至用户设备k。接下来，在步骤S1707中，基站在相同的传输资源上同时向包括用户设备k的一组用户设备进行下行数据传输。用户设备k可以通过对所接收到的DCI进行解码而获知 自身以及组内其他UE的DMRS配置，进而根据这些信息对所接收到的数据信息进行解调。
应指出，以上参照图17描述的信令交互过程仅为示例而非限制，本领域技术人员可以根据上述本公开的原理、结合实际情况而对上述交互过程进行修改。例如，图17中所编号的各个步骤仅是为了便于描述而不意味着对执行顺序的限制。举例来说，以上描述了分别在步骤S1705和S1706中发送的包括TCI状态的使用配置信息的DCI以及包括用户设备k自身的DMRS配置的DCI，但是这仅是为了说明UE k可以直接根据包括TCI状态的使用配置信息即可推出干扰DMRS配置而无需借助于UE k自身的DMRS配置，实际上这两个步骤可以是同时执行的，即，可以在同一条DCI中发送这两种信息。又例如，为了避免模糊本公开的主题，在上述流程图中省略了与本公开的技术相关性较低的一些交互过程。再者，图17中的一些步骤也可以省略。例如，在M较小的情况下，上述步骤S1702中的激活操作可以省略(在图17中以虚线示出)。所有这样的修改均应认为落入本公开的范围内，这里不再一一列举。
根据上述本公开的第三示例方案，通过基于现有的TCI机制间接地向目标用户设备指示MU-MIMO传输中的干扰数据流对应的DMRS配置，能够在不显著增加处理负荷和信令开销的情况下使得用户设备能够获知相关干扰信息以实现“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，有利于优化系统性能。
(1-4.第四示例方案)
在本公开的第四示例方案中，提出了基于目标用户设备自身的DMRS配置以及该DMRS配置所在的码分复用(Code Division Multiplexing,CDM)组的相关信息来间接地通知MU-MIMO传输组中的干扰DMRS配置。
首先，将简要介绍DMRS和CDM组的相关概念。DMRS使用利用了Walsh码的正交序列(正交码)、以及基于伪随机序列的加扰序列而构成。另外，下行DMRS(DL-DMRS)针对每个天线端口是独立的，能够在各自的资源块配对内进行复用。DL-DMRS利用CDM以及/或者频分复用(Frequency Division Multiplexing,FDM)在天线端口间处于相互正交关系。DL-DMRS在CDM群组内分别利用正交码被码分复用。DL-DMRS在CDM群组间相互被频分复用。相同的CDM群组中的DL-DMRS分别被映射到相同的资源元素。相同的CDM 群组中的DL-DMRS在天线端口间分别使用不同的正交序列，这些正交序列处于相互正交关系。下行数据信道PDSCH用的DL-DMRS能够使用最多12个天线端口(天线端口1000至1011)的一部分或者全部。也就是说，在单用户-多输入多输出(SU-MIMO)传输的情况下，与DL-DMRS关联起来的PDSCH能够进行最大直至8个秩(rank)的MIMO发送；在MU-MIMO传输的情况下，每个UE最多分配4个秩(rank)，所有UE加起来最多分配12个秩(rank)。下行控制信道PDCCH用的DL-DMRS例如使用4个天线端口(天线端口1007～1010)的一部分或者全部。。另外，DL-DMRS能够根据被关联起来的信道的秩数来改变CDM的扩散编码长、被映射的资源元素的数量。
图18是示出DMRS端口7至10在资源元素(RE)上的映射图案的示例的示意图，在图18中，以阴影填充的方格分别表示在天线端口7至10(即，DMRS端口7至10)被映射至的资源元素。具体而言，在LTE中，例如，如图18所示，同一CDM群组中的DMRS端口7和8被映射至相同的资源元素，从而在CDM群组CDM4中分别使用码字[+1+1+1+1]和码字[+1-1+1-1]；DMRS端口9和10被映射至相同的资源元素，从而在CMD群组CDM4中分别使用码字[+1+1+1+1]和码字[+1-1+1-1]。
一般而言，当给定了一个DMRS端口以及该DMRS端口所在的CDM组之后，该CDM组中所包括的其他DMRS端口也是确定的。鉴于此，在本公开的第四示例方案中，提出了基站可以通过例如DCI向目标UE通知其所在的CDM组中的全部或部分的码字使用情况，从而间接地通知各个DMRS端口在MU-MIMO传输中的使用情况。举例来说，假设在CDM4中，基站通过DCI将DMRS端口7分配给目标UE并告知目标UE该CDM组中的全部码字均被MU-MIMO传输的DMRS端口使用，则目标UE可以推断该CDM4组中的其他DMRS端口8,11,13为MU-MIMO传输中的干扰端口，进而进行干扰消除和数据解调以便恢复出目标数据流，从而实现了“非透明”MU-MIMO传输。
下面将分别详细描述用于实现上述第四示例方案的用户设备侧和基站侧的配置示例。
图19是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图19所示，根据该示例的装置1900可以包括确定单元1902和解码单 元1904。其中，解码单元1904的功能配置示例与以上参照图3描述的解码单元304的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
确定单元1902可以进一步包括DMRS配置集合确定模块1921和干扰DMRS配置确定模块1922。
DMRS配置集合确定模块1921可以被配置成确定与用于MU-MIMO传输的CDM组对应的DMRS配置集合。
具体而言，目前NR支持CDM2、CDM4和CDM8。在建立RRC连接之后，基站可以通过例如用户专属的高层RRC信令向目标UE通知为其配置的DMRS端口所在的CDM组，即，CDM2、CDM4和CDM8中的哪一个。此外，在RRC层，如果确定了DMRS配置的类型，则DMRS与CDM组的关系也是确定的。例如，一般而言，对于与PDSCH关联的DMRS,主要支持CDM4。这样，用户设备侧的DMRS配置集合确定模块1921可以通过对来自基站的高层信令进行解码而获知用于数据信道的MU-MIMO传输的CDM组，进而唯一地确定与该CDM组对应的DMRS配置集合。
干扰DMRS配置确定模块1922可以被配置成根据控制信息中包括的CDM组的配置信息，确定作为干扰DMRS配置的其他用户设备的DMRS配置。
具体地，例如，CDM组的配置信息可以包括指示其中的码字是否全部被MU-MIMO传输的DMRS端口使用的信息。例如，可以以1比特的信息来指示，1指示全部被使用，而0指示仅部分使用。干扰DMRS配置确定模块1922可以在根据配置信息确定CDM组中的码字全部被使用时，将DMRS配置集合中不同于目标UE的DMRS配置的其他DMRS配置确定为干扰DMRS配置。
另一方面，如果该配置信息指示CDM组中的码字未被全部使用，则还需要结合进一步的信息来确定哪些码字被使用，哪些码字未被使用，以确定干扰DMRS配置。
优选地，来自基站的控制信息中所包括的CDM组的配置信息可以是指示CDM组中的码字占用情况的信息。该信息优选地可以是位图形式的信息，例如，被DMRS端口占用的码字在位图中表示1，而未被DMRS端口占用的码字在位图中表示为0。举例来说，假设与CDM4对应的位图信息为“1010”中，则表示CDM4中的码字[+1 +1 +1 +1]和[+1 -1 +1 -1]被两个干扰DMRS端口占 用，而其余两个码字[+1 +1 -1 -1]和[-1 +1 +1 -1]则没有被使用。
这样，干扰DMRS配置确定模块1922可以进一步根据控制信息中包括的指示CDM组中的码字占用情况的位图信息，确定CDM组中被占用的码字，进而将DMRS配置集合中与被占用的码字对应的DMRS端口确定为干扰DMRS端口。
可以看出，通过以位图形式来通知CDM组中的码字占用情况，使得本公开的方案能够同时适用于部分使用CDM组和全部使用CDM组的情况。但是，在全部使用的情况下，如上所述，通过以例如1比特的信息“1”进行指示，也可以节省位图信息的信令开销，这在CDM4和CDM8的情况下尤其明显。因此，在实际实现时，也可以将这两种信息通知方式相结合。例如，在根据1比特的信息确定CDM组全部被使用时，则可以直接根据目标UE的DMRS配置来推出干扰DMRS配置；反之，在根据1比特的信息确定CDM组未被全部使用时，再结合指示CDM组的具体使用情况的位图信息来确定干扰DMRS配置。
与上述用户设备侧的配置示例相对应的，下面将描述基站侧的配置示例。
图20是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图20所示，根据该示例的装置2000可以包括控制信息生成单元2002和传输控制单元2004。传输控制单元2004的功能配置示例与以上参照图4描述的传输控制单元404的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
控制信息生成单元2002可以进一步包括配置信息生成模块2021和控制信息生成模块2022。
配置信息生成模块2021可以被配置成根据进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备的DMRS配置，生成用于MU-MIMO传输的CDM组的配置信息。作为一种示例实现，该配置信息可以用于指示与该CDM组对应的DMRS配置集合是否全部用于该MU-MIMO传输，即，指示该CDM组中的码字是否全部被MU-MIMO传输的干扰DMRS端口使用。例如，1表示全部被使用，0表示仅部分被使用。
控制信息生成模块2022可以被配置成通过包括CDM组的配置信息和目标UE的DMRS配置来生成控制信息，用于间接地指示MU-MIMO传输中的 干扰DMRS配置。该控制信息可以通过例如物理层的用户专属DCI发送给目标UE。由此，目标UE可以根据接收到的控制信息，在其中的配置信息指示CDM组全部被使用的情况下，将与该CDM组对应的DMRS配置集合中不同于其自身的DMRS配置的其他DMRS配置确定为干扰DMRS配置。
另一方面，如上所述，存在CDM组中的码字未被全部使用的情况。因此，优选地，作为另一示例实现，配置信息生成模块2021所生成的配置信息可以包括用于指示CDM组中的码字使用情况的位图信息。例如，1表示该码字被干扰DMRS端口使用，0表示该码字未被DMRS端口使用。控制信息生成模块2022可以通过包括该位图形式的配置信息来生成控制信息，并通过例如物理层的用户专属DCI将该控制信息发送给目标UE，以向目标UE间接地指示干扰DMRS配置。
此外，优选地，装置2000还可以包括CDM组配置单元2006，用于向目标UE配置用于其MU-MIMO传输的CDM组。
具体地，CDM组配置单元2006可以被配置成针对目标UE，生成用于MU-MIMO传输的CDM组的指示信息，用于指示使用的是CDM2、CDM4和CDM4中的哪一个。该指示信息可以包括在例如高层RRC信令中发送给目标UE。
可以理解，由于针对不同的CDM组(CDM2/4/8)，包括在DCI中的用于指示CDM组中的码字使用情况的例如上述位图形式的配置信息可能具有不同的长度。因此，通过由基站预先通过RRC告知用户设备所使用的CDM组，用户设备可以根据该RRC配置而相应地解读DCI中的不同长度的位图信息，避免了信息解调失败。
此外，应指出，这里参照图20描述的基站侧的配置示例是与上述用户设备侧的配置示例相对应的，因此在此未详细描述的内容可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
为了便于进一步理解上述第四示例方案，以下将参照图21所示的流程图来描述用于实现第四示例方案的信令交互过程。图21是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用于实现第四示例方案的信令交互过程的流程图。
如图21所示，首先，在建立RRC连接之后，在步骤S2101中，基站通过RRC信令向用户设备k配置用于MU-MIMO传输的CDM组。然后，在步骤 S2102中，基站向用户设备k发送下行参考信号CSI-RS以获取信道状态信息，用户设备k在步骤S2103中将测量得到的信道状态信息发送至基站。然后，在步骤S2104中，基站基于用户设备k以及其他用户设备上报的信道状态信息并结合具体网络状况而进行MU-MIMO传输调度，从而根据调度结果生成指示CDM组的配置信息，并将该配置信息以及用户设备k的DMRS配置包括在例如DCI中以发送给用户设备k。该配置信息可以包括指示CDM组中的码字是否全部被使用的1比特信息，以及/或者包括指示CDM组中的码字的具体使用情况的位图信息，以向用户设备k指示MU-MIMO传输中的干扰DMRS配置。接下来，在步骤S2105中，基站在相同的传输资源上同时向包括用户设备k的一组用户设备进行下行数据传输。用户设备k可以通过对所接收到的DCI进行解码而获知自身以及组内其他UE的DMRS配置，进而根据这些信息对所接收到的数据信息进行解调。
应指出，以上参照图21描述的信令交互过程仅为示例而非限制，本领域技术人员可以根据上述本公开的原理、结合实际情况而对上述交互过程进行修改。例如，图21中所编号的各个步骤仅是为了便于描述而不意味着对执行顺序的限制。又例如，为了避免模糊本公开的主题，在上述流程图中省略了与本公开的技术相关性较低的一些交互过程。所有这样的修改均应认为落入本公开的范围内，这里不再一一列举。
根据上述本公开的第四示例方案，通过利用各个类型的DMRS配置与CDM组之间的确定对应关系，将目标UE的DMRS配置以及其所在的CDM组的使用情况通知给目标UE，使得能够在不显著增加处理负荷和信令开销的情况下使用户设备获知相关干扰信息以实现“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，有利于优化系统性能。
这里，应指出，以上结合第一至第四示例方案描述了根据本公开的第一实施例的通过间接地向用户设备通知MU-MIMO传输的干扰情况来实现下行数据信道的“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，但是应理解，这些示例方案仅为优选实施例而非限制，本领域技术人员也可以根据上述本公开的原理而对上述方案进行适当的修改或组合，这样的变型当然应认为落入本公开的范围内。
[2.下行控制信道的MU-MIMO传输(第二实施例)]
以下将描述根据本公开的第二实施例的关于下行控制信道的MU-MIMO传输。这里所谓的下行控制信道的MU-MIMO传输是指，将针对多个不同用户设备的下行控制信道(即，UE-specific PDCCH)叠加在相同的时频资源上进行传输，以便能够提高时频资源的利用效率。
如上所述，在现有技术中，通常在某一时频资源上仅会传输针对某一UE的控制信道(即，UE-specific PDCCH)，而不会如数据信道一样，将针对多个UE的控制信道叠加在相同的时频资源上进行传输。本发明人认识到，这是由于如上述第一实施例中所述，对于目标UE，其数据信道的MU-MIMO传输可以由目标UE的控制信道UE-specific PDCCH承载的控制信令(例如，UE-specific DCI)来辅助，例如，将数据信道的MU-MIMO传输的相关控制信息(包括目标UE的DMRS配置以及直接地或间接地指示干扰DMRS配置的信息)包括在UE-specific DCI中。然而，如果对用户设备本身的控制信道也进行MU-MIMO传输，则该控制信道无法用于提供有关其自身的MU-MIMO传输的相关控制信息，即，目标UE的UE-specific PDCCH所对应的DMRS配置以及可选的其他UE的UE-specific PDCCH所对应的DMRS配置。基于所面临的问题，现有技术尚未提出任何可以有效地实现控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的方案。
在NR系统中，已支持使用组共用PDCCH(Group Common PDCCH，也可以简写为GC-PDCCH)来承载关于时隙结构的信息，例如，时隙格式指示(Slot Format Indicator，SFI)。
这里需要简单说明一下GC-PDCCH与公共搜索空间(Common Search Space，CSS)的关系。CSS是所有UE都可以去尝试盲解码的，而用户专属搜索空间只有该UE被提前配置才会尝试盲解码。本公开中的GC-PDCCH可以位于CSS从而容易地被一组UE当中的UE解码。
在本公开的第二实施例中，提出了可以使用GC-PDCCH来承载控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的相关控制信息。也就是说，在本公开的实施例中，GC-PDCCH不仅包括SFI等时隙信息，还包括用于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。基站可以通过RRC为用户设备配置GC-PDCCH可用的时频资源，用户设备通过在相应的时频资源上进行检测而接收GC-PDCCH，从GC-PDCCH中获取关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，进而根据该 控制信息从所接收到的叠加信号流中恢复出自身的UE-specific PDCCH。这种向用户设备发送GC-PDCCH和UE-specific PDCCH的结构也可以称为两级(dual-stage)DCI结构。为了便于理解该过程，将参照图22所示的流程图来简要描述用于实现控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的两级DCI结构的信令交互流程图。
如图22所示，首先，在步骤S2201中，基站向用户设备k发送下行参考信号CSI-RS以获取信道状态信息，用户设备k在步骤S2202中将测量得到的信道状态信息发送至基站。然后，在步骤S2203中，基站基于用户设备k以及其他用户设备上报的信道状态信息并结合具体网络状况而进行MU-MIMO传输调度，并根据调度结果向用户设备k发送GC-PDCCH(此为第一级DCI)，该GC-PDCCH包括SFI以及关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。然后，在步骤S2204中，基站向用户设备k发送其专属的UE-specific PDCCH(此为第二级DCI)。不同于现有技术，该UE-specific PDCCH与MU-MIMO传输组中的其他用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在相同的时频资源上进行传输，因而用户设备所接收到的信号并非是其自身单独的UE-specific PDCCH，而是叠加了其他用户设备的UE-specific PDDCH。接下来，在步骤S2205中，基站向用户设备k发送数据流，该数据流与MU-MIMO传输组中的其他用户设备的数据流叠加在一起进行传输。这样，用户设备k可以首先根据所接收到GC-PDCCH中包括的关于MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，从所接收到的叠加信号流中恢复出其自身的UE-specific PDCCH，进而根据UE-specific PDDCH中包括的关于数据信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，从所接收到的叠加数据流中恢复出目标数据流。如何根据UE-specific PDCCH中包括的关于数据信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息来解调目标数据流可参见上述第一实施例中的方案，或者也可以采用现有技术中的其他方案，在该实施例中不再进行详细讨论。
这里需要指出，在图22所示的流程图中，描述了同时存在控制信道的MU-MIMO传输和数据信道的MU-MIMO传输，但是这仅是示例而非限制，这两者当然是可以独立存在的。还应指出，即使这两者同时存在，控制信道的MU-MIMO方式可以和数据信道的MU-MIMO方式也可以不同。举例来说，假设一个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH在MU-MIMO传输时只有一层，而 该用户设备的数据信息在MU-MIMO传输时却包括多个层。具体地，例如，假设共有3个UE做MU-MIMO传输，控制信道的MU-MIMO传输可以仅包括3层，每层分属于一个UE；而数据信道的MU-MIMO传输可以包括6层，每个UE包括两层数据流。
另外，用于传输PDCCH的DMRS配置(也称为PDCCH关联的DMRS配置)和用于传输PDSCH的DMRS配置(也称为PDSCH关联的DMRS配置)本身也可以不同。例如，利用天线端口107至114中的一个或者多个发送与PDCCH关联的DMRS，而利用天线端口7至14中的一个或多个发送与PDSCH关联的DMRS。
另外，还需指出，这里并不限制一个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH在MU-MIMO传输中可以占用的层数，可以是一层或多层，也就是说，在一个时隙中可以存在针对一个UE的一个或多个DCI。
接下来将分别详细描述用于实现上述根据本公开的第二实施例的利用GC-PDCCH来辅助实现控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的方案的用户设备侧和基站侧的配置示例。
图23是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的装置的功能配置示例的框图。
如图23所示，根据该示例的装置2300可以包括MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元2302和专属传输控制信息获取单元2304。
应指出，图23所示的装置中的各个功能单元仅是根据其所实现的具体功能而划分的逻辑模块，而不是用于限制具体的实现方式。在实际实现时，上述各个功能单元和模块可被实现为独立的物理实体，或者也可由单个实体(例如，处理器(CPU或DSP等)、集成电路等)来实现，这同样适用于随后关于用户设备侧的其他配置示例的描述。下面将详细描述各个功能单元的配置示例。
MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元2302可以被配置成对针对包括目标用户设备的一组用户设备的GC-PDCCH进行解码，以获取关于这组用户设备的控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。
具体地，来自基站的GC-PDCCH可以包括关于一组用户设备各自的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在一起进行MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，该控制信息例如可以包括与各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH所对应的DMRS配置有 关的信息，包括DMRS端口号、加扰ID以及层数；或者也可以是用于生成DMRS的伪随机序列及相应正交覆盖码(OCC)的信息。
专属传输控制信息获取单元2304可以被配置成根据所获取的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，对与其他用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在相同的传输资源上进行传输的、目标UE的UE-specific PDCCH进行解码，以获取关于目标UE的传输控制信息。
具体而言，利用用于发送DMRS关联的PDCCH的子帧以及频带，发送与PDCCH关联的DMRS。DMRS用于进行DMRS关联的PDCCH的解调。利用用于发送DMRS的天线端口发送PDCCH。因此，与数据信息类似，在获知了至少目标UE的UE-specific PDCCH所对应的DMRS配置之后，目标UE就可以从所接收到的叠加信号流中恢复出其自己的UE-specific PDCCH，以获取其中专属于目标UE的传输控制信息，该专属传输控制信息可以用于关于物理下行共享信道(PDSCH)和物理上行共享信道(PUSCH)的传输控制，也可以用于未来关于直通链路(sidelink)的传输控制，例如关于直通链路-共享信道(SL-SCH)、物理直通链路控制信道(PSCCH)等的传输控制，这里所谓的传输控制包括资源分配、传输格式/调制编码格式、混合自动重传请求(HARQ)信息、DMRS分配等等。
这里，应指出，上述用户设备侧的装置2300可以以芯片级来实现，或者也可以以设备级来实现。例如，装置2300可以工作为用户设备本身，并且还可以包括诸如存储器、收发器(可选的，在图23中以虚线框示出)等外部设备。存储器可以用于存储用户设备实现各种功能需要执行的程序和相关数据信息。收发器可以包括一个或多个通信接口以支持与不同设备(例如，基站、其他用户设备等等)间的通信，这里不具体限制收发器的实现形式。这同样适用于随后关于用户设备侧的其他配置示例的描述。
与上述图23所示的用户设备侧的装置的配置示例相对应的，本公开还提供了以下基站侧的配置示例。图24是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧的装置的功能配置示例的框图。
如图24所示，根据该示例的装置2400可以包括控制信道生成单元2402和传输控制单元2404。
同样地，应指出，图24所示的装置中的各个功能单元仅是根据其所实现 的具体功能而划分的逻辑模块，而不是用于限制具体的实现方式。在实际实现时，上述各个功能单元或模块可被实现为独立的物理实体，或者也可由单个实体(例如，处理器(CPU或DSP等)、集成电路等)来实现，这同样适用于随后关于基站侧的其他配置示例的描述。下面将详细描述各个功能单元的配置示例。
控制信道生成单元2402可被配置成生成针对一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道(GC-PDCCH)以及一组用户设备中的各个用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道(UE-specific PDCCH)，其中，GC-PDCCH包括关于一组用户设备的所有用户设备的控制信道的多用户-多输入多输出MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，该控制信息可以包括例如各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH所对应的DMRS配置。
传输控制单元2404可以被配置成将所生成的GC-PDCCH发送至一组用户设备，并且基于GC-PDCCH中的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，控制基站在相同的传输资源上同时向各个用户设备发送各自的UE-specific PDCCH。
应指出，这里所描述的基站侧的装置的配置示例是与上述用户设备侧的装置的配置示例相对应的，因此在此未详细描述的内容可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
此外，还应指出，上述基站侧的装置2400可以以芯片级来实现，或者也可以以设备级来实现。例如，装置2400可以工作为基站本身，并且还可以包括诸如存储器、收发器(可选的，在图24中以虚线框示出)等外部设备。存储器可以用于存储基站实现各种功能需要执行的程序和相关数据信息。收发器可以包括一个或多个通信接口以支持与不同设备(例如，用户设备、其他基站等等)间的通信，这里不具体限制收发器的实现形式。这同样适用于随后关于基站侧的其他配置示例的描述。
根据本公开的技术的GC-PDCCH中除了包括SFI等时隙信息之外还包括关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。然而，如上所述，GC-PDCCH是面向所有UE的，即，所有的UE都会尝试对GC-PDCCH进行解码，而其中包括的MU-MIMO传输控制信息是仅面向要对其控制信道进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备。因此，优选地，为了避免除这一组UE之外的其他UE 解码得到该控制信息，考虑对这部分内容进行加扰。下面将简要介绍现有的DCI加扰技术。
对DCI附加循环冗余校验(Cyclic Redundancy Check，CRC)奇偶校验位。CRC奇偶校验位被无线网络临时标识符(Radio Network Temporary Identifier，RNTI)加扰。RNTI是能够根据DCI的目的等进行规定或者设定的标识符。RNTI是按照标准预先规定的标识符、作为小区专用的信息而设定的标识符、作为终端装置专用的信息而设定的标识符、或者作为属于终端装置的群组专用的信息而设定的标识符。例如，终端装置在PDCCH的监视中，以预定的RNTI对附加于DCI的CRC奇偶校验位进行解扰，识别CRC是否正确。在CRC正确的情况下，可知该DCI为用于终端装置的DCI。
在本公开中，设计了专用于GC-PDCCH中的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息的加扰的组共用标识符。根据该组共用标识符的加扰对象，可以将其称为例如MU-PDCCH RNTI或MU-MIMO RNTI，以区别于用于其他目的的RNTI。例如，用于GC-PDCCH中的SFI的加扰的标识符可以称为SFI RNTI。
为了便于进一步理解本公开的技术，下面将参照图25来描述GC-PDCCH与UE-specific PDCCH的关系以及GC-PDCCH中所包含的信息。图25是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的GC-PDCCH的示例架构以及GC-PDCCH与UE-specific PDDCH之间的关系的示意图。
在图25所示的示例中，控制信道的MU-MIMO传输包括4层，如图25的右侧所示，在UE接收到的UE-specific PDCCH中叠加了针对4个UE的专属传输控制信息，从上至下依次为UE1、UE2、UE k和UE m的传输控制信息。图25的左侧示出了组共用PDCCH，其中包括例如SFI等信息以及以例如MU-PDCCH RNTI加扰的MU-MIMO传输控制信息，该MU-MIMO传输控制信息中的四个方框分别表示UE1、UE2、UE k和UE m各自的UE-specific PDCCH相关联的DMRS配置(包括DMRS端口号、加扰ID和层数)。假设与UE 1、UE 2、UE k和UE m对应的DMRS配置分别称为DMRS配置1、DMRS配置2、DMRS配置k和DMRS配置m。这样，对于例如UE k而言，通过解码GC-PDCCH而获得了至少自身的DMRS配置k之后，可从接收到的UE-specific PDCCH中尝试解调恢复自身的传输控制信息。
在以下的描述中，作为示例，将分别结合第一示例方案、第二示例方案和第二示例方案的变型例详细描述对GC-PDCCH中的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息的加扰方案。
(2-1.第一示例方案)
在本公开的第一示例方案中，提出了利用组共用标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI对GC-PDCCH中所包括的各个UE的DMRS配置进行加扰。图26是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的第一示例方案的示意图。
应指出，在图26所示的示意图中，为了清楚的目的，省略了GC-PDCCH中还包括的SFI等信息的图示，而仅示出了与本公开的技术密切相关的部分。
如图26所示，利用MU-PDCCH RNTI分别对GC-PDCCH中包括的UE1、UE2、UE k和UE m的DMRS配置进行加扰。由于组共用标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI是进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备共知的(例如，基站可以通过例如高层RRC信令提前为可能参与MU-MIMO传输的用户设备配置MU-PDCCH RNTI)，因此UE1、UE2、UE k和UE m均可以利用MU-PDCCH RNTI对加扰后的GC-PDCCH进行解扰，从而可以得到四个DMRS配置。然而，此时，各个UE并不知道哪一个DMRS配置是自身的DMRS配置，哪些DMRS配置是干扰。因此，用户设备可以基于所获得的所有DMRS配置尝试对UE-specific PDCCH进行盲解码，即，进行不同的干扰DMRS配置假设以尝试是否可以解码出UE-specific PDCCH，并利用用户专属标识符(例如，小区无线网络临时标识符C-RNTI)对解码得到的信息进行验证。即，以C-RNTI对UE-specific PDCCH的CRC奇偶校验位进行解扰，识别CRC是否正确。如果CRC正确，则验证通过，说明所解码的信息正是针对用户本身的传输控制信息。
可以看出，在上述第一示例方案中，利用组共用标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI对MU-MIMO传输组中的各个用户设备的DMRS配置进行加扰。这种加扰方案也可以称为是“一级加扰方案”。各个用户设备可以通过利用MU-PDCCH RNTI解码GC-PDCCH而获知全组的DMRS配置，并通过基于不同的干扰DMRS假设进行干扰消除来解码UE-specific PDCCH，也就是说，用户设备不 仅知道自身的DMRS配置，而且知道干扰UE的DMRS配置，因此第一示例方案相当于是控制信道的“非透明”MU-MIMO传输。
下面将分别详细描述用于实现上述第一示例方案的用户设备侧和基站侧的配置示例。
图27是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图27所示，根据该示例的装置2700可以包括MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元2702和专属传输控制信息获取单元2704。
MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元2702可以被配置成利用组共用标识符对来自基站的GC-PDCCH进行解码，以获取关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元2702可以进一步包括标识符获取模块2721和解扰模块2722。
标识符获取模块2721可以被配置成从基站获取组共用标识符(例如，MU-PDCCH RNTI)和用户设备的专属标识符(例如，C-RNTI)。解扰模块2722可以被配置成利用组共用标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI对GC-PDCCH进行解码，以获取其中包括的全部用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。以图26所示的配置为例，假设与UE 1、UE 2、UE k和UE m对应的DMRS配置分别称为DMRS配置1、DMRS配置2、DMRS配置k和DMRS配置m，以UE k作为目标UE的示例，则UE k的解扰模块2722可以解码获得DMRS配置1、DMRS配置2、DMRS配置k和DMRS配置m。
专属传输控制信息获取单元2704可以被配置成基于MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元2702所获取的控制信息和目标用户设备的专属标识符，对目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH进行解码，以获取关于目标用户设备的传输控制信息。
优选地，专属传输控制信息获取单元2704可以进一步包括盲解码模块2741和验证模块2742。
盲解码模块2741可以被配置成基于MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元2702所获取的控制信息，通过将其他用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH处理为干扰来对目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH进行盲解码。
具体而言，以图26所示的示例中的UE k作为目标UE的示例，UE k的 盲解码模块2741可以分别将所获取的四个DMRS配置(包括DMRS配置1、DMRS配置2、DMRS配置k和DMRS配置m)中的一个DMRS配置假设作为自身的DMRS配置，并且将其余三个DMRS配置假设为干扰DMRS配置，从而根据例如以上描述的线性干扰消除方式而对所接收到的UE-specific PDCCH解码。
但是，此时并不能保证解码出的信息就是针对UE k的传输控制信息。因此，还需要进行验证。
验证模块2742可以被配置成利用利用UE k的专属标识符(例如，C-RNTI)对所解码的信息进行验证，并获取验证通过的所解码的信息作为关于目标用户设备的传输控制信息。
具体而言，UE k利用自身的C-RNTI依次对解码出的传输控制信息中的CRC奇偶校验位进行解扰，识别CRC是否正确。如果CRC正确，则验证通过，说明此条传输控制信息正是针对UE k的。
与上述用户设备侧的配置示例相对应的，以下将描述基站侧的配置示例。图28是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图28所示，根据该示例的装置2800可以包括控制信道生成单元2802和传输控制单元2804。其中，传输控制单元2804的功能配置示例与以上参照图24描述的传输控制单元2404的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
控制信道生成单元2802进一步包括加扰模块2821和通知模块2822。
加扰模块2821可以被配置成通过利用组共用标识符(例如，MU-PDCCH RNTI)对GC-PDCCH中包括的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息进行加扰来生成GC-PDCCH。
具体地，参照上述图26，加扰模块2821利用MU-PDCCH RNTI对GC-PDCCH中包括的四个DMRS配置(包括DMRS配置1、DMRS配置2、DMRS配置k和DMRS配置m)分别进行加扰，以得到加扰后的GC-PDCCH。
通知模块2822可以被配置成控制基站将组共用标识符(例如，MU-PDCCH RNTI)发送至各个用户设备，从而进行控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的这组用户设备均可以通过利用MU-PDCCH RNTI对所接收到的GC-PDCCH进行解码而获得其中包括的DMRS配置。
应指出，这里所描述的基站侧的装置的配置示例是与上述用户设备侧的装置的配置示例相对应的，因此在此未详细描述的内容可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
可以看出，根据上述第一示例加扰方案，用户设备侧的解扰操作和基站侧的加扰操作均较为简单，但是，用户设备需要基于多种干扰假设而对UE-specific PDCCH进行盲解码，因此用户设备侧的处理负荷较大。为了支持用户设备对UE-specific PDCCH的盲解码，避免由于MU-MIMO传输的总层数过多而导致用户设备的接收机无法解调相应信息，优选地，对于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输，总层数可以包括两层和四层。
此外，根据上述第一示例加扰方案，用户设备可以获知干扰情况，并进行干扰消除和信号解调，实际上实现了控制信道的“非透明”MU-MIMO传输，从而提高了系统的吞吐量和可靠性。
(2-2.第二示例方案)
在本公开的第二示例方案中，提出了一种两级加扰方案。将参照图29详细描述该两级加扰方案。图29是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的第二示例方案的示意图。
如图29所示，对于GC-PDCCH中所包括的各个DMRS配置，分别利用组共用标识符和用户专属标识符对其进行两次加扰。具体而言，以UE k为例，GC-PDCCH中所包括的DMRS配置k分别利用组共用标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI和UE k的用户专属标识符(C-RNTI k)进行加扰。例如，可以先用MU-PDCCH RNTI进行第一级加扰以得到加扰后的第一内容，然后再利用C-RNTI k对第一内容进行第二级加扰以得到第二内容。应指出，这两次加扰中所使用的加扰RNTI的顺序不受限制。优选地，可以先用C-RNTI k进行加扰，再利用MU-PDCCH RNTI进行加扰，相应地在UE k解扰时的顺序是先使用组共用的MU-MIMO RNTI来确定PDCCH MU-MIMO传输的发生，再使用C-RNTI k来确定自身的PDCCH参与MU-MIMO传输及其有关的信息。这样，仅同时掌握了MU-PDCCH RNTI和C-RNTI k的UE k才可以解调出GC-PDCCH中所包括的DMRS配置k。类似地，其他用户设备UE 1、UE 2 和UE m也仅可以解调出自身的DMRS配置。
可以看出，上述第二示例方案中的两级加扰方案使得用户设备仅能够获知自身的DMRS配置而无法知道同组的其他UE的干扰情况，因此这种方案实质上相当于一种“透明”MU-MIMO传输。
下面将分别详细描述用于实现上述第二示例方案的用户设备侧和基站侧的配置示例。
图30是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图30所示，根据该示例的装置3000可以包括MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元3002和专属传输控制信息获取单元3004。
MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元3002可以被配置成通过利用组共用标识符和用户设备的专属标识符对来自基站的GC-PDCCH进行解码来获取目标用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。
具体地，MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元3002可以进一步包括标识符获取模块3021、第一解扰模块3022和第二解扰模块3023。
标识符获取模块3021可以被配置成从基站获取组共用标识符(例如，MU-PDCCH RNTI)和用户设备的专属标识符(例如，C-RNTI)。
第一解扰模块3022可以被配置成利用组共用标识符和用户设备的专属标识符之一(例如，MU-PDCCH RNTI)对所接收到的GC-PDCCH进行解码以获取第一内容。
第二解扰模块3023可以被配置成利用组共用标识符和用户设备的专属标识符中的另一个(例如，C-RNTI)对第一解扰模块3022获取到的第一内容进行解码，以获取目标UE的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。
具体地，以图29所示的UE k为例，通过由第一解扰模块3022和第二解扰模块3023利用组共用标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI和UE k的专属标识符C-RNTI k对GC-PDCCH进行两级解扰，可以唯一地获得GC-PDCCH中所包括的DMRS配置k。应指出，尽管在以上示例中描述了第一解扰模块3022先利用组共用标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI对GC-PDCCH进行第一级解扰，再由第二解扰模块3023利用用户专属标识符C-RNTI进行第二级解扰，但是这并不是限制，在两级解扰中所使用的解扰RNTI的顺序可以交换。
专属传输控制信息获取单元3004可以被配置成基于所获取的目标UE的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，对所接收到的UE-specific PDCCH进行解码，从而获取其中包括的针对UE k的传输控制信息。
具体而言，仍以图29所示的示例中的UE k作为目标UE的示例，UE k的专属传输控制信息获取单元3004可以基于所获取的UE k的DMRS配置k，对所接收到的UE-specific PDCCH解码。
在该示例方案中，UE k无法得知组内其他UE的DMRS配置，因而也无法进行干扰消除，从而对UE k的接收机的处理性能要求较低。
与上述用户设备侧的配置示例相对应的，以下将描述基站侧的配置示例。图31是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图31所示，根据该示例的装置3100可以包括控制信道生成单元3102和传输控制单元3104。其中，传输控制单元3104的功能配置示例与以上参照图24描述的传输控制单元2404的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
控制信道生成单元3102可以被配置成通过利用组共用标识符和用户设备的专属标识符分别对GC-PDCCH中所包括的各个UE的关于MU-MIMO传输的控制信息进行加扰来生成GC-PDCCH，并且控制基站将组共用标识符和每个用户设备的专属标识符发送至该用户设备。具体地，控制信道生成单元3102可以进一步包括第一加扰模块3121、第二加扰模块3122和通知模块3123。
第一加扰模块3121可以被配置成针对一组用户设备，通过利用组共用标识符和各个用户设备的专属标识符之一(例如，MU-PDCCH RNTI)对各个用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息进行加扰，生成关于各个用户设备的第一内容。
具体而言，参照图29所示的示例，第一加扰模块3121可以先利用例如组共用标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI对其中的四个DMRS配置(DMRS配置1、DMRS配置2、DMRS配置k和DMRS配置m)分别进行第一级加扰，从而得到分别关于UE 1、UE 2、UE k和UE m的第一内容。
第二加扰模块3122可以被配置成通过利用组共用标识符和各个用户设备的专属标识符中的另一个(例如，C-RNTI)分别对关于各个用户设备的第一内容进行加扰，从而生成包括一组用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传 输控制信息的GC-PDCCH。
参照图29所示的示例，第二加扰模块3122可以利用例如各个用户设备的专属标识符对第一加扰模块3121获得的第一内容进行第二级加扰。更具体而言，第二加扰模块3122利用UE 1的C-RNTI 1对已利用MU-PDCCH RNTI加扰后的DMRS配置1进行第二级加扰，利用UE 2的C-RNTI 2对已利用MU-PDCCH RNTI加扰后的DMRS配置2进行第二级加扰，利用UE k的C-RNTI k对已利用MU-PDCCH RNTI加扰后的DMRS配置k进行第二级加扰，并且利用UE m的C-RNTI m对已利用MU-PDCCH RNTI加扰后的DMRS配置m进行第二级加扰，由此得到包括两级加扰的MU-MIMO传输控制信息的GC-PDCCH。
通知模块3123可以被配置成针对每个用户设备，控制基站将组共用标识符和该用户设备的专属标识符发送至该用户设备。
具体而言，参照图29所示的示例，通知模块3123将组共用标识符标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI发送至全组用户设备，但是将UE 1的专属标识符C-RNTI 1仅发送至UE 1，将UE 2的专属标识符C-RNTI 2仅发送至UE 2，将UE k的专属标识符C-RNTI k仅发送至UE k，并且将UE m的专属标识符C-RNTI m仅发送至UE m。这样，只有同时掌握了这两个RNTI的用户设备才可以成功解码出在GC-PDCCH中所包括的针对该用户设备的控制信息，进而可以利用该控制信息对所接收到的叠加了其他UE的专属传输控制信息的UE-specific PDCCH进行解码，以从中恢复出针对用户设备本身的专属传输控制信息。
应指出，这里所描述的基站侧的装置的配置示例是与上述用户设备侧的装置的配置示例相对应的，因此在此未详细描述的内容可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
可以看出，根据上述第二示例加扰方案，虽然用户设备侧的解扰操作和基站侧的加扰操作稍显复杂，但是，由于每个用户设备仅能获知自身的DMRS配置，从而在不进行干扰消除的情况下尝试对UE-specific PDCCH进行解码，因此用户设备侧的接收机的实现较简单，处理负荷小。
此外，根据上述第二示例加扰方案，用户设备可以仅根据自身的DMRS配置进行信息解调，而不进行干扰消除，实际上实现了控制信道的“透明”MU-MIMO传输，从而简化了接收机的设计和处理并降低了成本。
(2-3.第二示例方案的变型例)
根据上述第二示例方案，各个UE仅能从GC-PDCCH中恢复出自身的DMRS配置而无法知道组内的其他UE的干扰情况。在该变型例中，提出了可以将第二实施例与第一实施例相结合，从而可以将作为“透明”MU-MIMO传输的第二示例方案转化为“非透明”MU-MIMO传输。
作为一种示例实现，可以在GC-PDCCH中关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息中包括MU-MIMO传输的总层数。图32A是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的第二示例方案的变型例的第一示例的示意图。
如图32A所示，相比于图29所示的示例，在表示关于UE 1、UE 2、UE k和UE m的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息的方框中，除了包括UE自身的DMRS配置之外，还增加了MU-MIMO传输的总层数。
在该变型例中，如第二实施例中的第二示例方案所述，分别利用组共用标识符和专属标识符对表示各个UE的方框中的信息(包括DMRS配置和总层数)进行加扰，从而每个UE可以从GC-PDCCH中解码得到自身的DMRS配置以及控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的总层数。然后，结合上述第一实施例中的第一示例方案，通过预先通过高层信令向用户设备通知DMRS分配方案或者根据存储的默认DMRS分配方案，用户设备可以根据该DMRS分配方案、自身的DMRS配置以及MU-MIMO传输的总层数，间接地推出与其一同被调度进行控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的其他UE的DMRS配置，进而能够进行干扰消除和信息解调，从而实现了控制信道的“非透明”MU-MIMO传输。如何根据DMRS分配方案、总层数和用户自身的DMRS配置来推出其他UE的DMRS配置可参见上述第一实施例的描述，在此不再重复。
根据上述图32A所示的示例，将关于MU-MIMO传输的总层数的信息设置中关于每个UE的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息中，并且分别利用组共用标识符和各个UE的专属标识符对其进行加扰。然而，由于对于一组进行MU-MIMO传输的用户设备来说，总层数信息是相同的信息。因此，优选地，为了减少总层数信息在GC-PDCCH中所占用的信令资源，该总层数信息也可以被设置为对一组UE共同的信息。
图32B是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的第二示例方案的变型例的第二示例的示意图。如图32B所示，以独立于表示四个UE的DMRS配置的方框的一个方框来表示总层数信息。该总层数信息可以仅用组共用标识符MU-PDCCH RNTI进行一级加扰，从而仅被配置了该组共用标识符的用户设备能够从GC-PDCCH中解码出该总层数信息。
应指出，以上参照图32A和图32B描述了借助于MU-MIMO传输的总层数信息来间接推出控制信道的MU-MIMO传输中的干扰信息的示例，但是这并不意味着任何限制，本领域技术人员也可根据本公开的原理而对图32A和图32B所示的示例方案进行适当的修改，并且这样的修改应认为落入本公开的范围内。
此外，还应指出，尽管这里以第一实施例中的第一示例方案和第二实施例中的第二示例方案为例描述了第二实施例与第一实施例的结合，但是这仅是示例而非限制，本领域技术人员也可以根据本公开的原理而对第一实施例和第二实施例进行其他适当的结合，并且这样的结合均应认为落入本公开的范围内。
(2-4.第三示例方案)
一般而言，基站在建立RRC连接之后通过RRC信令为用户设备配置GC-PDCCH和UE-specific PDCCH可能出现的控制资源集合(Control Resource Set,CORESET)的范围，随后用户设备可以根据基站所配置的CORESET而分别对来自基站的GC-PDCCH和UE-specific PDCCH进行检测和接收。
图33是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的GC-PDCCH和UE-specific PDCCH在时频域上的关系的示意图。
如图33所示，控制信道一般出现在前三个OFDM符号上，并且GC-PDCCH一般出现在UE-specific PDCCH之前。由于基站通过RRC信令配置的往往是一个比较宽的时频资源范围，随着通信过程的推进，基站会变得更了解网络的资源分配和利用状况，从而可能希望能够缩小先前配置的CORESET的范围，以提高资源利用效率。
此外，还应指出，图33示出了在承载UE-specific PDCCH的RE组中包括有DMRS，并且这些DMRS与UE-specific PDCCH的控制信息分别放置在 同一物理资源块(PRB)内的不同RE上。这与原有的通信系统是不同的，在原有的通信系统中，PDCCH并不携带DMRS，因此在原有的通信系统中也不可能针对控制信道进行MU-MIMO传输。
鉴于此，在本公开的第三示例方案中，提出了可以在GC-PDCCH中承载关于UE-specific PDCCH可能出现的控制资源集合的指示信息，以缩小基站先前通过RRC配置的UE-specific PDCCH的CORESET的范围，这样，可以大大减少由于基站在RRC配置CORESET资源时对确切的调度信息无法提前预知而带来的资源浪费。也就是说，通过利用GC-PDCCH动态调整用户设备对于UE-specific PDCCH的搜索空间，可以降低UE的计算复杂度以及功耗，并且减小了PDCCH的检测时延，优化了系统性能和资源利用效率。
下面将分别详细用于实现上述第三示例方案的用户设备侧和基站侧的配置示例。
图34是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图34所示，根据该示例的装置3400可以包括MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元3402、指示信息获取单元3404、检测单元3406和专属传输控制信息获取单元3408。其中，MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元3402和专属传输控制信息获取单元3408的功能配置示例与以上参照图23描述的MU-MIMO传输控制信息获取单元2302和专属传输控制信息获取单元2304的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
指示信息获取单元3404可以被配置成通过对GC-PDCCH进行解码来获取用于传输UE-specific PDCCH的传输资源所属的控制资源集合的指示信息。
具体地，来自基站的GC-PDCCH中还包括UE-specific PDCCH可能出现的CORESET的指示信息。该指示信息优选地可以包括UE-specific PDCCH可能出现的CORESET所占用的OFDM符号有关的指示，即，UE-specific PDCCH可能出现在前三个OFDM符号中的哪几个OFDM符号上的指示。
检测单元3406可以被配置成根据所获取的指示信息在相应的控制资源集合上进行检测，以接收用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH。
与上述图34所示的用户设备侧的装置的配置示例相对应的，本公开还提供了以下基站侧的配置示例。图35是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧 的装置的另一功能配置示例的框图。
如图35所示，根据该示例的装置3500可以包括控制信道生成单元3502和传输控制单元3504。其中，传输控制单元3504的功能配置示例与以上参照图24描述的传输控制单元2404的功能配置示例基本上相同，在此不再重复。
控制信道生成单元3502被配置成将指示各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH的传输资源所属的控制资源集合的信息包括在GC-PDCCH中，以由各个用户设备通过解码GC-PDCCH而对各自的UE-specific PDCCH行接收检测。
具体而言，来自基站的GC-PDCCH中除了可以包括一组用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息之外，还可以包括关于各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH可能出现的CORESET的指示信息。这是由于相比于通过RRC配置GC-PDCCH和UE-specific PDCCH可能出现的CORESET的时刻，基站此时能够做出更精准的资源调度，从而可以缩小UE-specific PDCCH可能出现的CORESET的范围，并将相关的指示信息包括在先于UE-specific PDCCH出现的GC-PDCCH中，以便用户设备可以根据GC-PDCCH中包括的指示信息而在缩小的CORESET的范围上进行UE-specific PDCCH的检测和接收。
优选地，该指示信息可以包括用于传输UE-specific PDCCH的传输资源所属的CORESET所占用的OFDM符号有关的指示，即，UE-specific PDCCH可能出现在哪几个OFDM符号上的指示。
可以看出，根据本公开的第三示例方案，通过将UE-specific PDCCH可能出现的CORESET的更详细信息包括在GC-PDCCH中，可以缩小用户设备对UE-specific PDCCH的搜索空间，例如，从三个OFDM符号缩小至两个OFDM符号甚至一个OFDM符号，从而大大减小了用户设备的处理负荷和功耗并且减小了UE-specific PDCCH的检测时延。同时，由于基站可以进行更精准的资源调度，也大大提高了资源利用效率。
根据上述第二实施例，提供了有关控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的多种具体实现方案，相比于现有技术中在某一传输资源上仅传输针对某一UE的控制信道，大大提高了资源利用效率。
应指出，尽管以上参照附图所示的框图描述了本公开的装置实施例，但是 这仅是示例而非限制，本领域技术人员也可以根据本公开的原理而对其中的各个功能模块进行添加、删除、修改、组合和/变更等，并且所有这样的变型应认为落入本公开的范围内。
[3.根据本公开的方法实施例]
(3-1.第一实施例)
与上述装置实施例相对应的，本公开还提供了以下方法实施例。
图36是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的用户设备侧的方法的过程示例的流程图。
如图36所示，根据该实施例的方法开始于步骤S3601。在步骤S3601中，根据来自基站的关于用户设备与其他用户设备同时被调度进行MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，确定其他用户设备的传输相关配置，其中，该控制信息包括间接地指示其他用户设备的传输相关配置的信息。
优选地，该传输相关配置可以包括DMRS配置。有关目标UE根据控制信息中包括的间接地指示其他用户设备的DMRS配置的信息间接地推出其他用户设备的DMRS配置的具体实现示例可以参见以上第一实施例的第一至第四示例方案中关于用户设备侧的装置的描述，在此不再重复。
接下来，该方法进行到步骤S3602。在步骤S3602中，基于所确定的其他用户设备的传输相关配置，对从基站接收到的利用MU-MIMO传输而发送的信号进行解码，以获取针对用户设备的信号部分。
具体地，可以根据所获取的其他用户设备的DMRS配置以上述线性干扰消除方式从所接收到的叠加数据流中将针对其他用户设备的信号部分作为干扰而消除，进而恢复出针对目标UE的信号部分。具体过程可参见以上装置实施例中相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
图37是示出根据本公开的第一实施例的基站侧的方法的过程示例的流程图。
如图37所示，根据该实施例的方法开始于步骤S3701。在步骤S3701中，针对被同时调度进行MU-MIMO传输的一组用户设备内的一个或多个用户设备中的每个用户设备，生成关于MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，并且控制基站 将控制信息发送至该用户设备。该控制信息包括间接地指示一组用户设备内除该用户设备之外的其他用户设备的传输相关配置的信息。
所述“一个或多个用户设备”可以是一组用户设备中的全部用户设备，也可以是部分用户设备。换言之，基站可以仅向其中的部分用户设备间接地指示其他用户设备的传输相关配置，支持数据信道的“透明”和“不透明”MU-MIMO传输的混合配置。
此外，应指出，如何生成包括间接地指示其他用户设备的传输相关配置的信息的控制信息的具体实现示例可参见以上第一实施例的第一至第四示例方案中关于基站侧的装置的描述，在此不再重复。
接下来，该方法进行到步骤S3702。在步骤S3702中，控制基站在特定传输资源上同时向一组用户设备发送信号。
这里，应指出，这里描述的第一实施例中的用户设备侧和基站侧的方法分别对应于上述第一实施例中的用户设备侧和基站侧的装置，因此在此未详细描述的内容，可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
(3-2.第二实施例)
图38是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的用户设备侧的方法的过程示例的流程图。
如图38所示，根据该实施例的方法开始于步骤S3801。在步骤S3801中，对包括目标用户设备的一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道(GC-PDCCH)进行解码，以获取关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。这里的控制信道的MU-MIMO传输是指将多个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在相同的时频资源上进行传输。
如何对GC-PDCCH进行解码以获取一组用户设备的全部UE的DMRS配置或者获取仅目标UE自身的DMRS配置的具体实现示例可参见以上第二实施例的第一至第三示例方案中关于用户设备侧的装置的描述，在此不再重复。
接下来，该方法进行到步骤S3802。在步骤S3802中，基于所获取的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，对与其他UE的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在相同的时频资源上进行传输的、目标UE的UE-specific PDCCH进行解 码，以获取目标UE的专属传输控制信息。
优选地，还可以通过对GC-PDCCH进行解码而获取基站用于传输UE-specific PDCCH的传输资源所属的CORESET的指示信息，进而根据该指示信息在相应的时频资源上进行检测以接收UE-specific PDCCH。
图39是示出根据本公开的第二实施例的基站侧的方法的过程示例的流程图。
如图39所示，根据该实施例的方法开始于步骤S3901。在步骤S3901中，生成一组用户设备的GC-PDCCH以及各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH。优选地，GC-PDCCH中包括关于一组用户设备的控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。有关GC-PDCCH中所包括的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息的具体加扰过程可参见以上第二实施例的第一至第三示例方案中关于基站侧的装置的描述，在此不再重复。
此外，优选地，GC-PDCCH中还包括指示各个UE的UE-specific PDCCH可能出现的CORESET的信息，以缩小用户设备对UE-specific PDCCH的搜索空间。
接下来，该方法进行到步骤S3902。在步骤S3902中，控制基站将所生成的GC-PDCCH发送至一组用户设备，并且基于关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息，控制基站在相同的传输资源上发送一组用户设备中的各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH。
这里，应指出，这里描述的第二实施例中的用户设备侧和基站侧的方法分别对应于上述第二实施例中的用户设备侧和基站侧的装置，因此在此未详细描述的内容，可参见以上相应位置的描述，在此不再重复。
此外，还应指出，尽管以上参照图36至图39所示的流程图描述了根据本公开的方法实施例，但是这仅是示例而非限制，本领域技术人员也可以根据本公开的原理对上述各个步骤进行添加、删除、组合和/或变更，并且各个步骤的顺序也可以适当地改变，所有这样的变型均应认为落入本公开的范围内。
此外，根据本公开的实施例，还提供了一种电子设备，该电子设备可包括收发机和一个或多个处理器，这一个或多个处理器可被配置成执行上述根据本公开的实施例的无线通信系统中的方法或装置中的相应单元的功能，并且收发机可以承担相应的通信功能。
应理解，根据本公开的实施例的存储介质和程序产品中的机器可执行的指令还可以被配置成执行与上述装置实施例相对应的方法，因此在此未详细描述的内容可参考先前相应位置的描述，在此不再重复进行描述。
相应地，用于承载上述包括机器可执行的指令的程序产品的存储介质也包括在本发明的公开中。该存储介质包括但不限于软盘、光盘、磁光盘、存储卡、存储棒等等。
[4.用以实施本公开的装置和方法的实施例的计算设备]
另外，还应该指出的是，上述系列处理和装置也可以通过软件和/或固件实现。在通过软件和/或固件实现的情况下，从存储介质或网络向具有专用硬件结构的计算机，例如图40所示的通用个人计算机4000安装构成该软件的程序，该计算机在安装有各种程序时，能够执行各种功能等等。图40是示出作为本公开的实施例中可采用的信息处理设备的个人计算机的示例结构的框图。
在图40中，中央处理单元(CPU)4001根据只读存储器(ROM)4002中存储的程序或从存储部分4008加载到随机存取存储器(RAM)4003的程序执行各种处理。在RAM 4003中，也根据需要存储当CPU 4001执行各种处理等时所需的数据。
CPU 4001、ROM 4002和RAM 4003经由总线4004彼此连接。输入/输出接口4005也连接到总线4004。
下述部件连接到输入/输出接口4005：输入部分4006，包括键盘、鼠标等；输出部分4007，包括显示器，比如阴极射线管(CRT)、液晶显示器(LCD)等，和扬声器等；存储部分4008，包括硬盘等；和通信部分4009，包括网络接口卡比如LAN卡、调制解调器等。通信部分4009经由网络比如因特网执行通信处理。
根据需要，驱动器4010也连接到输入/输出接口4005。可拆卸介质4011比如磁盘、光盘、磁光盘、半导体存储器等等根据需要被安装在驱动器4010上，使得从中读出的计算机程序根据需要被安装到存储部分4008中。
在通过软件实现上述系列处理的情况下，从网络比如因特网或存储介质比如可拆卸介质4011安装构成软件的程序。
本领域的技术人员应当理解，这种存储介质不局限于图40所示的其中存储有程序、与设备相分离地分发以向用户提供程序的可拆卸介质4011。可拆卸介质4011的例子包含磁盘(包含软盘(注册商标))、光盘(包含光盘只读存储器(CD-ROM)和数字通用盘(DVD))、磁光盘(包含迷你盘(MD)(注册商标))和半导体存储器。或者，存储介质可以是ROM 4002、存储部分4008中包含的硬盘等等，其中存有程序，并且与包含它们的设备一起被分发给用户。
[5.本公开的技术的应用示例]
本公开的技术能够应用于各种产品。例如，本公开中提到的基站可以被实现为gNodeB(gNB)、任何类型的eNB(诸如宏eNB和小eNB)、传输接收点(TRP)、企业长期演进(eLTE)-eNB等等。小eNB可以为覆盖比宏小区小的小区的eNB，诸如微微eNB、微eNB和家庭(毫微微)eNB。代替地，基站可以被实现为任何其他类型的基站，诸如NodeB和基站收发台(Base Transceiver Station，BTS)。基站可以包括：被配置为控制无线通信的主体(也称为基站设备)；以及设置在与主体不同的地方的一个或多个远程无线头端(Remote Radio Head，RRH)。另外，下面将描述的各种类型的终端均可以通过暂时地或半持久性地执行基站功能而作为基站工作。
例如，本公开中提到的用户设备可以被实现为车辆、移动终端(诸如智能电话、平板个人计算机(PC)、笔记本式PC、便携式游戏终端、便携式/加密狗型移动路由器和数字摄像装置)、车载终端(诸如汽车导航设备)、无人机、移动台等等。用户设备还可以被实现为执行机器对机器(M2M)通信的终端(也称为机器类通信(MTC)终端)。此外，用户设备可以为安装在上述终端中的每个终端上的无线通信模块(诸如包括单个晶片的集成电路模块)。
以下将参照图41至图44描述根据本公开的应用示例。
<5-1.关于基站的应用示例>
(第一应用示例)
图41是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的eNB的示意性配置的第一示例的框图。eNB 1400包括一个或多个天线1410以及基站设备1420。基站设备 1420和每个天线1410可以经由RF线缆彼此连接。
天线1410中的每一个均包括单个或多个天线元件(诸如包括在多输入多输出(MIMO)天线中的多个天线元件)，并且用于基站设备1420发送和接收无线信号。如图41所示，eNB 1400可以包括多个天线1410。例如，多个天线1410可以与eNB 1400使用的多个频段兼容。虽然图41示出其中eNB 1400包括多个天线1410的示例，但是eNB 1400也可以包括单个天线1410。
基站设备1420包括控制器1421、存储器1422、网络接口1423以及无线通信接口1425。
控制器1421可以为例如CPU或DSP，并且操作基站设备1420的较高层的各种功能。例如，控制器1421根据由无线通信接口1425处理的信号中的数据来生成数据分组，并经由网络接口1423来传递所生成的分组。控制器1421可以对来自多个基带处理器的数据进行捆绑以生成捆绑分组，并传递所生成的捆绑分组。控制器1421可以具有执行如下控制的逻辑功能：该控制诸如为无线资源控制、无线承载控制、移动性管理、接纳控制和调度。该控制可以结合附近的eNB或核心网节点来执行。存储器1422包括RAM和ROM，并且存储由控制器1421执行的程序和各种类型的控制数据(诸如终端列表、传输功率数据以及调度数据)。
网络接口1423为用于将基站设备1420连接至核心网1424的通信接口。控制器1421可以经由网络接口1423而与核心网节点或另外的eNB进行通信。在此情况下，eNB 1400与核心网节点或其他eNB可以通过逻辑接口(诸如S1接口和X2接口)而彼此连接。网络接口1423还可以为有线通信接口或用于无线回程线路的无线通信接口。如果网络接口1423为无线通信接口，则与由无线通信接口1425使用的频段相比，网络接口1423可以使用较高频段用于无线通信。
无线通信接口1425支持任何蜂窝通信方案(诸如长期演进(LTE)、LTE-先进(LTE-A)和新无线接入技术(NR))，并且经由天线1410来提供到位于eNB 1400的小区中的终端的无线连接。无线通信接口1425通常可以包括例如基带(BB)处理器1426和RF电路1427。BB处理器1426可以执行例如编码/解码、调制/解调以及复用/解复用，并且执行层(例如L1、介质访问控制(MAC)、无线链路控制(RLC)和分组数据汇聚协议(PDCP))的各种类型 的信号处理。代替控制器1421，BB处理器1426可以具有上述逻辑功能的一部分或全部。BB处理器1426可以为存储通信控制程序的存储器，或者为包括被配置为执行程序的处理器和相关电路的模块。更新程序可以使BB处理器1426的功能改变。该模块可以为插入到基站设备1420的槽中的卡或刀片。可替代地，该模块也可以为安装在卡或刀片上的芯片。同时，RF电路1427可以包括例如混频器、滤波器和放大器，并且经由天线1410来传送和接收无线信号。
如图41所示，无线通信接口1425可以包括多个BB处理器1426。例如，多个BB处理器1426可以与eNB 1400使用的多个频段兼容。如图41所示，无线通信接口1425可以包括多个RF电路1427。例如，多个RF电路1427可以与多个天线元件兼容。虽然图41示出其中无线通信接口1425包括多个BB处理器1426和多个RF电路1427的示例，但是无线通信接口1425也可以包括单个BB处理器1426或单个RF电路1427。
(第二应用示例)
图42是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的eNB的示意性配置的第二示例的框图。eNB 1530包括一个或多个天线1540、基站设备1550和RRH 1560。RRH 1560和每个天线1540可以经由RF线缆而彼此连接。基站设备1550和RRH 1560可以经由诸如光纤线缆的高速线路而彼此连接。
天线1540中的每一个均包括单个或多个天线元件(诸如包括在MIMO天线中的多个天线元件)并且用于RRH 1560发送和接收无线信号。如图42所示，eNB 1530可以包括多个天线1540。例如，多个天线1540可以与eNB1530使用的多个频段兼容。虽然图42示出其中eNB 1530包括多个天线1540的示例，但是eNB 1530也可以包括单个天线1540。
基站设备1550包括控制器1551、存储器1552、网络接口1553、无线通信接口1555以及连接接口1557。控制器1551、存储器1552和网络接口1553与参照图41描述的控制器1421、存储器1422和网络接口1423相同。
无线通信接口1555支持任何蜂窝通信方案(诸如LTE、LTE-先进和NR)，并且经由RRH 1560和天线1540来提供到位于与RRH 1560对应的扇区中的终 端的无线通信。无线通信接口1555通常可以包括例如BB处理器1556。除了BB处理器1556经由连接接口1557连接到RRH 1560的RF电路1564之外，BB处理器1556与参照图41描述的BB处理器1426相同。如图42所示，无线通信接口1555可以包括多个BB处理器1556。例如，多个BB处理器1556可以与eNB 1530使用的多个频段兼容。虽然图42示出其中无线通信接口1555包括多个BB处理器1556的示例，但是无线通信接口1555也可以包括单个BB处理器1556。
连接接口1557为用于将基站设备1550(无线通信接口1555)连接至RRH1560的接口。连接接口1557还可以为用于将基站设备1550(无线通信接口1555)连接至RRH 1560的上述高速线路中的通信的通信模块。
RRH 1560包括连接接口1561和无线通信接口1563。
连接接口1561为用于将RRH 1560(无线通信接口1563)连接至基站设备1550的接口。连接接口1561还可以为用于上述高速线路中的通信的通信模块。
无线通信接口1563经由天线1540来传送和接收无线信号。无线通信接口1563通常可以包括例如RF电路1564。RF电路1564可以包括例如混频器、滤波器和放大器，并且经由天线1540来传送和接收无线信号。如图42所示，无线通信接口1563可以包括多个RF电路1564。例如，多个RF电路1564可以支持多个天线元件。虽然图42示出其中无线通信接口1563包括多个RF电路1564的示例，但是无线通信接口1563也可以包括单个RF电路1564。
在图41和图42所示的eNB 1400和eNB 1530中，上述基站侧的装置中的收发器可以由无线通信接口1425以及无线通信接口1555和/或无线通信接口1563实现。上述基站侧的装置的功能的至少一部分也可以由控制器1421和控制器1551实现。
<5-2.关于用户设备的应用示例>
(第一应用示例)
图43是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的智能电话1600的示意性配置的示例的框图。智能电话1600包括处理器1601、存储器1602、存储装置1603、 外部连接接口1604、摄像装置1606、传感器1607、麦克风1608、输入装置1609、显示装置1610、扬声器1611、无线通信接口1612、一个或多个天线开关1615、一个或多个天线1616、总线1617、电池1618以及辅助控制器1619。
处理器1601可以为例如CPU或片上系统(SoC)，并且控制智能电话1600的应用层和另外层的功能。存储器1602包括RAM和ROM，并且存储数据和由处理器1601执行的程序。存储装置1603可以包括存储介质，诸如半导体存储器和硬盘。外部连接接口1604为用于将外部装置(诸如存储卡和通用串行总线(USB)装置)连接至智能电话1600的接口。
摄像装置1606包括图像传感器(诸如电荷耦合器件(CCD)和互补金属氧化物半导体(CMOS))，并且生成捕获图像。传感器1607可以包括一组传感器，诸如测量传感器、陀螺仪传感器、地磁传感器和加速度传感器。麦克风1608将输入到智能电话1600的声音转换为音频信号。输入装置1609包括例如被配置为检测显示装置1610的屏幕上的触摸的触摸传感器、小键盘、键盘、按钮或开关，并且接收从用户输入的操作或信息。显示装置1610包括屏幕(诸如液晶显示器(LCD)和有机发光二极管(OLED)显示器)，并且显示智能电话1600的输出图像。扬声器1611将从智能电话1600输出的音频信号转换为声音。
无线通信接口1612支持任何蜂窝通信方案(诸如LTE、LTE-先进和新无线接入技术NR)，并且执行无线通信。无线通信接口1612通常可以包括例如BB处理器1613和RF电路1614。BB处理器1613可以执行例如编码/解码、调制/解调以及复用/解复用，并且执行用于无线通信的各种类型的信号处理。同时，RF电路1614可以包括例如混频器、滤波器和放大器，并且经由天线1616来传送和接收无线信号。无线通信接口1612可以为其上集成有BB处理器1613和RF电路1614的一个芯片模块。如图43所示，无线通信接口1612可以包括多个BB处理器1613和多个RF电路1614。虽然图43示出其中无线通信接口1612包括多个BB处理器1613和多个RF电路1614的示例，但是无线通信接口1612也可以包括单个BB处理器1613或单个RF电路1614。
此外，除了蜂窝通信方案之外，无线通信接口1612可以支持另外类型的无线通信方案，诸如短距离无线通信方案、近场通信方案和无线局域网(LAN)方案。在此情况下，无线通信接口1612可以包括针对每种无线通信方案的BB 处理器1613和RF电路1614。
天线开关1615中的每一个在包括在无线通信接口1612中的多个电路(例如用于不同的无线通信方案的电路)之间切换天线1616的连接目的地。
天线1616中的每一个均包括单个或多个天线元件(诸如包括在MIMO天线中的多个天线元件)，并且用于无线通信接口1612传送和接收无线信号。如图43所示，智能电话1600可以包括多个天线1616。虽然图43示出其中智能电话1600包括多个天线1616的示例，但是智能电话1600也可以包括单个天线1616。
此外，智能电话1600可以包括针对每种无线通信方案的天线1616。在此情况下，天线开关1615可以从智能电话1600的配置中省略。
总线1617将处理器1601、存储器1602、存储装置1603、外部连接接口1604、摄像装置1606、传感器1607、麦克风1608、输入装置1609、显示装置1610、扬声器1611、无线通信接口1612以及辅助控制器1619彼此连接。电池1618经由馈线向图43所示的智能电话1600的各个块提供电力，馈线在图中被部分地示为虚线。辅助控制器1619例如在睡眠模式下操作智能电话1600的最小必需功能。
在图43所示的智能电话1600中，上述用户设备侧的装置中的收发器可以由无线通信接口1612实现。上述用户设备侧的装置的功能的至少一部分也可以由处理器1601或辅助控制器1619实现。
(第二应用示例)
图44是示出可以应用本公开内容的技术的汽车导航设备1720的示意性配置的示例的框图。汽车导航设备1720包括处理器1721、存储器1722、全球定位系统(GPS)模块1724、传感器1725、数据接口1726、内容播放器1727、存储介质接口1728、输入装置1729、显示装置1730、扬声器1731、无线通信接口1733、一个或多个天线开关1736、一个或多个天线1737以及电池1738。
处理器1721可以为例如CPU或SoC，并且控制汽车导航设备1720的导航功能和另外的功能。存储器1722包括RAM和ROM，并且存储数据和由处理器1721执行的程序。
GPS模块1724使用从GPS卫星接收的GPS信号来测量汽车导航设备1720的位置(诸如纬度、经度和高度)。传感器1725可以包括一组传感器，诸如陀 螺仪传感器、地磁传感器和空气压力传感器。数据接口1726经由未示出的终端而连接到例如车载网络1741，并且获取由车辆生成的数据(诸如车速数据)。
内容播放器1727再现存储在存储介质(诸如CD和DVD)中的内容，该存储介质被插入到存储介质接口1728中。输入装置1729包括例如被配置为检测显示装置1730的屏幕上的触摸的触摸传感器、按钮或开关，并且接收从用户输入的操作或信息。显示装置1730包括诸如LCD或OLED显示器的屏幕，并且显示导航功能的图像或再现的内容。扬声器1731输出导航功能的声音或再现的内容。
无线通信接口1733支持任何蜂窝通信方案(诸如LTE、LTE-先进和新无线接入技术NR)，并且执行无线通信。无线通信接口1733通常可以包括例如BB处理器1734和RF电路1735。BB处理器1734可以执行例如编码/解码、调制/解调以及复用/解复用，并且执行用于无线通信的各种类型的信号处理。同时，RF电路1735可以包括例如混频器、滤波器和放大器，并且经由天线1737来传送和接收无线信号。无线通信接口1733还可以为其上集成有BB处理器1734和RF电路1735的一个芯片模块。如图44所示，无线通信接口1733可以包括多个BB处理器1734和多个RF电路1735。虽然图44示出其中无线通信接口1733包括多个BB处理器1734和多个RF电路1735的示例，但是无线通信接口1733也可以包括单个BB处理器1734或单个RF电路1735。
此外，除了蜂窝通信方案之外，无线通信接口1733可以支持另外类型的无线通信方案，诸如短距离无线通信方案、近场通信方案和无线LAN方案。在此情况下，针对每种无线通信方案，无线通信接口1733可以包括BB处理器1734和RF电路1735。
天线开关1736中的每一个在包括在无线通信接口1733中的多个电路(诸如用于不同的无线通信方案的电路)之间切换天线1737的连接目的地。
天线1737中的每一个均包括单个或多个天线元件(诸如包括在MIMO天线中的多个天线元件)，并且用于无线通信接口1733传送和接收无线信号。如图44所示，汽车导航设备1720可以包括多个天线1737。虽然图44示出其中汽车导航设备1720包括多个天线1737的示例，但是汽车导航设备1720也可以包括单个天线1737。
此外，汽车导航设备1720可以包括针对每种无线通信方案的天线1737。 在此情况下，天线开关1736可以从汽车导航设备1720的配置中省略。
电池1738经由馈线向图44所示的汽车导航设备1720的各个块提供电力，馈线在图中被部分地示为虚线。电池1738累积从车辆提供的电力。
在图44示出的汽车导航设备1720中，上述用户设备侧的装置中的收发器可以由通信接口1733实现。上述用户设备侧的装置的功能的至少一部分也可以由处理器1721实现。
本公开内容的技术也可以被实现为包括汽车导航设备1720、车载网络1741以及车辆模块1742中的一个或多个块的车载系统(或车辆)1740。车辆模块1742生成车辆数据(诸如车速、发动机速度和故障信息)，并且将所生成的数据输出至车载网络1741。
以上参照附图描述了本公开的优选实施例，但是本公开当然不限于以上示例。本领域技术人员可在所附权利要求的范围内得到各种变更和修改，并且应理解这些变更和修改自然将落入本公开的技术范围内。
例如，在以上实施例中包括在一个单元中的多个功能可以由分开的装置来实现。替选地，在以上实施例中由多个单元实现的多个功能可分别由分开的装置来实现。另外，以上功能之一可由多个单元来实现。无需说，这样的配置包括在本公开的技术范围内。
在该说明书中，流程图中所描述的步骤不仅包括以所述顺序按时间序列执行的处理，而且包括并行地或单独地而不是必须按时间序列执行的处理。此外，甚至在按时间序列处理的步骤中，无需说，也可以适当地改变该顺序。
虽然已经详细说明了本公开及其优点，但是应当理解在不脱离由所附的权利要求所限定的本公开的精神和范围的情况下可以进行各种改变、替代和变换。而且，本公开实施例的术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含，从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者设备不仅包括那些要素，而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素，或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者设备所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下，由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素，并不排除在包括所述要素的过程、方法、物品或者设备中还存在另外的相同要素。

Claims (26)

  1. 一种无线通信系统中的装置，所述装置包括处理电路，所述处理电路被配置成：
    对包括目标用户设备的一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道进行解码，以获取关于控制信道的多用户-多输入多输出MU-MIMO传输的控制信息；以及
    基于所述控制信息，对所述目标用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道UE-specific PDCCH进行解码，以获取关于所述目标用户设备的专属传输控制信息，
    其中，所述目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH与所述一组用户设备中的其他用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在相同的传输资源上进行传输。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的装置，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置成：
    从基站获取所述一组用户设备的组共用标识符和所述目标用户设备的专属标识符；
    利用所述组共用标识符对所述组共用物理下行控制信道进行解码，以获取所述一组用户设备中的所有用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息作为所述控制信息；以及
    基于所述控制信息和所述目标用户设备的专属标识符，对所述目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH进行解码，以获取关于所述目标用户设备的专属传输控制信息。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的装置，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置成：
    基于所获取的控制信息，通过将所述其他用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH处理为干扰来对所述目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH进行盲解码；以及
    利用所述目标用户设备的专属标识符对所解码的信息进行验证，并获取验证通过的所解码的信息作为关于所述目标用户设备的专属传输控制信息。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的装置，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置成：
    从基站获取所述一组用户设备的组共用标识符和所述目标用户设备的专属标识符；
    利用所述组共用标识符和所述目标用户设备的专属标识符对所述组共用 物理下行控制信道进行解码，以获取所述目标用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息作为所述控制信息；以及
    基于所获取的控制信息，对所述目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH进行解码，以获取关于所述目标用户设备的专属传输控制信息。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的装置，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置成：
    利用所述组共用标识符和所述目标用户设备的专属标识符之一对所述组共用物理下行控制信道进行解码，以获取第一内容；以及
    利用所述组共用标识符和所述目标用户设备的专属标识符中的另一个对所述第一内容进行解码，以获取所述控制信息。
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的装置，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置成：
    通过对所述组共用物理下行控制信道进行解码，获取所述传输资源所属的控制资源集合的指示信息；以及
    根据所述指示信息在所述控制资源集合上进行检测，以接收所述目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的装置，其中，所述指示信息包括所述控制资源集合所占用的OFDM符号有关的指示。
  8. 根据权利要求2至5中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述组共用标识符为组共用无线网络临时标识符，并且所述专属标识符为小区无线网络临时标识符C-RNTI。
  9. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述控制信息包括与解调参考信号DMRS配置有关的信息。
  10. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述控制信息包括所述一组用户设备的控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的总层数。
  11. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述一组用户设备的控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的总层数包括2和4。
  12. 根据权利要求1至7中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述装置工作为所述目标用户设备，并且还包括：存储器；以及收发器。
  13. 一种无线通信系统中的装置，所述装置包括处理电路，所述处理电路被配置成：
    生成一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道以及所述一组用户设备中 的各个用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道UE-specific PDCCH，所述组共用物理下行控制信道包括所述一组用户设备中的所有用户设备的关于控制信道的多用户-多输入多输出MU-MIMO传输的控制信息；
    控制基站将所述组共用物理下行控制信道发送至所述一组用户设备；以及
    基于所述控制信息，控制所述基站在相同的传输资源上发送所述一组用户设备中的各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的装置，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置成：
    通过利用组共用标识符对所述控制信息进行加扰来生成所述组共用物理下行控制信道；以及
    控制所述基站将所述组共用标识符发送至所述一组用户设备，以由所述一组用户设备中的各个用户设备通过解码所述组共用物理下行控制信道来获取所述控制信息。
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的装置，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置成：
    通过利用组共用标识符和各个用户设备的专属标识符分别对所述控制信息中的各个用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息进行加扰来生成所述组共用物理下行控制信道；以及
    针对每个用户设备，控制所述基站将所述组共用标识符和该用户设备的专属标识符发送至该用户设备，以由该用户设备通过解码所述组共用物理下行控制信道来获取所述控制信息中包括的该用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的装置，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置成：
    针对每个用户设备，通过利用所述组共用标识符和该用户设备的专属标识符之一对所述控制信息中的该用户设备的关于控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的控制信息进行加扰，生成关于该用户设备的第一内容；以及
    针对每个用户设备，通过利用所述组共用标识符和该用户设备的专属标识符中的另一个对关于该用户设备的第一内容进行加扰，生成所述组共用物理下行控制信道。
  17. 根据权利要求13所述的装置，其中，所述处理电路进一步被配置成：将指示用于发送各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH的传输资源所属的控制资源集合的信息包括在所述组共用物理下行控制信道中，以由各个用户设备通过 解码所述组共用物理下行控制信道而对各自的UE-specific PDCCH进行接收检测。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的装置，其中，指示所述控制资源集合的信息包括所述控制资源集合所占用的OFDM符号有关的指示。
  19. 根据权利要求14至16中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述组共用标识符为组共用无线网络临时标识符，并且所述专属标识符为小区无线网络临时标识符C-RNTI。
  20. 根据权利要求13至18中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述控制信息包括与解调参考信号DMRS配置有关的信息。
  21. 根据权利要求13至18中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述控制信息包括所述一组用户设备的控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的总层数。
  22. 根据权利要求13至18中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述一组用户设备的控制信道的MU-MIMO传输的总层数包括2和4。
  23. 根据权利要求13至18中任一项所述的装置，其中，所述装置工作为所述基站，并且还包括：存储器；以及收发器。
  24. 一种无线通信系统中的方法，所述方法包括：
    对包括目标用户设备的一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道进行解码，以获取关于所述一组用户设备的控制信道的多用户-多输入多输出MU-MIMO传输的控制信息；以及
    基于所述控制信息，对所述目标用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道UE-specific PDCCH进行解码，以获取关于所述目标用户设备的专属传输控制信息，
    其中，所述目标用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH与所述一组用户设备中的其他用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH叠加在相同的传输资源上进行传输。
  25. 一种无线通信系统中的方法，所述方法包括：
    生成一组用户设备的组共用物理下行控制信道以及所述一组用户设备中的各个用户设备的用户专属物理下行控制信道UE-specific PDCCH，所述组共用物理下行控制信道包括所述一组用户设备中的所有用户设备的关于控制信道的多用户-多输入多输出MU-MIMO传输的控制信息；
    控制基站将所述组共用物理下行控制信道发送至所述一组用户设备；以及
    基于所述控制信息，控制所述基站在相同的传输资源上发送所述一组用户设备中的各个用户设备的UE-specific PDCCH。
  26. 一种存储有程序的非暂态计算机可读存储介质，所述程序当由处理器执行时，使得所述处理器执行根据权利要求24或25所述的方法。
PCT/CN2019/074664 2018-02-11 2019-02-03 无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质 WO2019154386A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR1020207017749A KR20200119781A (ko) 2018-02-11 2019-02-03 무선 통신 시스템에서의 디바이스 및 방법, 및 컴퓨터-판독가능 저장 매체
US16/754,748 US11356153B2 (en) 2018-02-11 2019-02-03 Device and method in radio communication system, and computer-readable storage medium
CN201980004999.8A CN111213425A (zh) 2018-02-11 2019-02-03 无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质
US17/730,197 US20220263548A1 (en) 2018-02-11 2022-04-27 Device and method in radio communication system, and computer-readable storage medium

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810140997.9 2018-02-11
CN201810140997.9A CN110149643A (zh) 2018-02-11 2018-02-11 无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US16/754,748 A-371-Of-International US11356153B2 (en) 2018-02-11 2019-02-03 Device and method in radio communication system, and computer-readable storage medium
US17/730,197 Continuation US20220263548A1 (en) 2018-02-11 2022-04-27 Device and method in radio communication system, and computer-readable storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019154386A1 true WO2019154386A1 (zh) 2019-08-15

Family

ID=67548775

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/074664 WO2019154386A1 (zh) 2018-02-11 2019-02-03 无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (2) US11356153B2 (zh)
KR (1) KR20200119781A (zh)
CN (2) CN110149643A (zh)
WO (1) WO2019154386A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111447047B (zh) * 2019-01-16 2021-12-28 华为技术有限公司 发送信道信息的方法和装置与接收信道信息的方法和装置
US20220150019A1 (en) * 2019-02-15 2022-05-12 Lenovo (Beijing) Limited Indicating dmrs ports for codewords
CN111818629B (zh) * 2019-04-10 2022-04-29 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 数据传输方法和设备
WO2021012277A1 (en) * 2019-07-25 2021-01-28 Nec Corporation Indication of repetition number for physical shared channel
CN110786035B (zh) * 2019-09-26 2024-04-26 小米通讯技术有限公司 控制资源集合的处理方法、装置及计算机存储介质
US20220345270A1 (en) * 2019-10-04 2022-10-27 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Efficient resource reservation for lte-m and nb-iot
WO2021141306A1 (ko) * 2020-01-08 2021-07-15 현대자동차주식회사 사이드링크 통신을 위한 참조 신호의 송수신을 위한 방법 및 장치
US11558183B2 (en) * 2020-05-15 2023-01-17 Bank Of America Corporation System for exchanging symmetric cryptographic keys using computer network port knocking
CN117675133A (zh) * 2022-08-12 2024-03-08 华为技术有限公司 一种参考信号端口指示的方法及装置
WO2024045031A1 (zh) * 2022-08-31 2024-03-07 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102387598A (zh) * 2011-10-19 2012-03-21 新邮通信设备有限公司 一种物理下行控制信道的调度方法
CN106488572A (zh) * 2015-08-31 2017-03-08 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 叠加编码的多用户mimo的控制信息发送和接收方法
US20170273056A1 (en) * 2016-03-21 2017-09-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Scheduling uplink transmissions
CN107210898A (zh) * 2015-11-06 2017-09-26 联发科技股份有限公司 用于对干扰消除友好的新型空中接口的辅助信息和用户设备反馈

Family Cites Families (24)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20130114570A1 (en) * 2010-08-18 2013-05-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for transmitting uplink data in a wireless access system
CN102595469B (zh) * 2011-01-12 2016-11-16 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种信道质量指示信息的确定方法
US20120282936A1 (en) * 2011-05-02 2012-11-08 Research In Motion Limited Methods of PDCCH Capacity Enhancement in LTE Systems
US9735933B2 (en) * 2012-07-09 2017-08-15 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for receiving or transmitting downlink signal in wireless communication system and device therefor
US9203576B2 (en) * 2012-08-03 2015-12-01 Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson (Publ) Quasi co-located antenna ports for channel estimation
CN104737479B (zh) * 2012-10-18 2018-07-06 Lg电子株式会社 通信系统中接收或发送下行链路控制信号的方法及设备
EP2914038B1 (en) * 2012-11-14 2019-08-14 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Triggering method and related device
GB2512268B (en) * 2012-12-03 2015-02-18 Broadcom Corp Interference cancellation
US9705658B2 (en) * 2013-02-04 2017-07-11 Mbit Wireless, Inc. Method and apparatus for detecting inconsistent control information in wireless communication systems
WO2014148811A1 (ko) * 2013-03-19 2014-09-25 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 간섭을 제거하고 데이터를 수신하는 방법 및 장치
CN104144502B (zh) * 2013-05-10 2017-08-08 中国电信股份有限公司 物理下行控制信息获取方法、装置、终端和系统
CN105794288B (zh) * 2014-01-22 2019-06-18 夏普株式会社 用户装置、基站装置、集成电路以及通信方法
US10411828B2 (en) * 2014-03-20 2019-09-10 Intel IP Corporation Methods, systems, and devices for modulation and coding scheme signaling for common control channel
KR102319700B1 (ko) * 2014-05-02 2021-11-01 삼성전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 선택적 채널 피드백 방법 및 장치
US10149318B2 (en) * 2014-09-02 2018-12-04 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques for transmitting and receiving downlink control information for a set of NOMA downlink transmissions
EP3188559B1 (en) * 2014-09-30 2019-04-10 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Data transmission method and device
EP3269067B1 (en) * 2015-03-09 2019-08-07 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (publ) Reducing reference signals when communicating multiple sub-subframes between a base station and a wireless terminal
CN106162890B (zh) * 2015-04-14 2020-02-18 中国移动通信集团公司 一种解调参考信号dmrs端口的指示方法、装置及基站
CN106713193B (zh) * 2015-07-20 2021-11-12 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 一种多用户复用传输的方法和设备
CN106488573A (zh) * 2015-08-31 2017-03-08 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 叠加编码的多用户mimo的控制信息发送和接收方法
US10098105B2 (en) * 2015-09-14 2018-10-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Method of transmitting reference signal for multi user mutliplexing in multi-antenna-based wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
KR102473313B1 (ko) * 2016-06-08 2022-12-02 삼성전자 주식회사 이동 통신 시스템에서 이종 서비스의 제어 정보를 제공하는 방법 및 장치
US10306630B2 (en) * 2016-09-29 2019-05-28 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Systems and methods for determining frame structure and association timing
US20180220400A1 (en) * 2017-02-02 2018-08-02 Sharp Laboratories Of America, Inc. User equipments, base stations and methods

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102387598A (zh) * 2011-10-19 2012-03-21 新邮通信设备有限公司 一种物理下行控制信道的调度方法
CN106488572A (zh) * 2015-08-31 2017-03-08 北京信威通信技术股份有限公司 叠加编码的多用户mimo的控制信息发送和接收方法
CN107210898A (zh) * 2015-11-06 2017-09-26 联发科技股份有限公司 用于对干扰消除友好的新型空中接口的辅助信息和用户设备反馈
US20170273056A1 (en) * 2016-03-21 2017-09-21 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Scheduling uplink transmissions

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111213425A (zh) 2020-05-29
KR20200119781A (ko) 2020-10-20
US20210376888A1 (en) 2021-12-02
CN110149643A (zh) 2019-08-20
US11356153B2 (en) 2022-06-07
US20220263548A1 (en) 2022-08-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2019154390A1 (zh) 无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质
WO2019154386A1 (zh) 无线通信系统中的装置和方法、计算机可读存储介质
EP2810387B1 (en) Downlink inter-cell interference cancellation with cell aggregation coordinated multi-point
KR101883516B1 (ko) 협력형 다중지점 송신에서 다운링크 공유 채널 수신을 위한 방법, 시스템 및 장치
KR101537632B1 (ko) 단일 캐리어 셀 애그리게이션을 이용한 공동 전송 ＣｏＭＰ
WO2017028664A1 (zh) 用于无线通信的基站侧和用户设备侧的装置及方法
KR102493004B1 (ko) 기지국 장치, 단말 장치, 방법 및 기록 매체
EP4060926B1 (en) Wireless communication electronic device and method, and computer readable storage medium
KR20180080274A (ko) 기지국 측 및 사용자 장비 측 장치들 및 방법들과, 무선 통신 시스템
KR20180057673A (ko) 무선 통신 시스템 내의 전자 디바이스, 및 무선 통신 방법
US11297630B2 (en) Transmission apparatus, reception apparatus, transmission method, reception method, and recording medium
WO2019137308A1 (zh) 电子设备、无线通信方法和计算机可读存储介质
US12095696B2 (en) Device, method and medium for performing processing based on control information
JP7140129B2 (ja) 無線通信装置、無線通信方法およびコンピュータプログラム
WO2019001374A1 (zh) 用于无线通信的电子设备和方法
JP2020516087A (ja) 無線通信システムにおける電子機器、及び方法
WO2019154389A1 (zh) 电子设备、无线通信方法和计算机可读存储介质
CN116436585A (zh) 用于参考信号配置的方法和装置
WO2019019964A1 (zh) 电子装置、信息处理设备和信息处理方法
US11133905B2 (en) Apparatus and method in wireless communication system
WO2016150359A1 (zh) 无线通信设备和无线通信方法
WO2019138847A1 (ja) 無線通信装置、無線通信方法およびコンピュータプログラム
JP7230023B2 (ja) 端末及び無線通信方法
WO2017193292A1 (zh) 一种资源调度的方法、装置及系统
WO2023185659A1 (zh) 用户设备、电子设备、无线通信方法和存储介质

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19750617

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19750617

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1